SP36 - 2 - Soil Engineering PDF

LICENSED TO LANCO INFRATECH LIMITED, UDUOG VIHAR, GURGAON,
FOR INTERNAL USE AT THIS LOCATION ONLY

( Reaffirmed 2006 )
COMPENDIUM
OF INDIAN
STANDARDS
ON SOL
ENGINEERING
PART 2

BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

MANAK BHAVAN, 9 BAHADUR SHAH ZAFAR MARG
NEW DELHI 113002
SP 36 (Part 2) : 1988

FIRST PUBLISHED DECEMBER 1989
@ BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS
UDC 624.131
ISBN 81-7061-024-9
PRICE Rs 22O.OCJ
PRINTED IN INDIA
AT VIJAYALAKSHMI PRINTING WORKS, K-6, MAIN BAZAR LUXMI NAGAR, DELHI 110092 AND
PUBLISHED BY
BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS, NEW DELHI 1 loo02
PREFACE
The Soil Engineering Sectional Committee of the Bureau of Indian Standards has so far formulated
84 Indian Standards which relate to classification, glossary, subsurface investigation, methods of
laboratory testing, methods of field testing, soil testing equipment and soil based product. However,
these are not serially numbered nor the Indian Standards belonging to specific area of soil engineering
are grouped together. It may be difficult for the user to know about the full availability of Indian
Standards. The Committee, therefore, recommended the publication of a compendium of all the
Indian Standards formulated by it and this has resulted in this publication.
In order to establish uniform procedure for the determination of different characteristics of soils

and also for facilitating comparative studies of the results, the Bureau of Indian Standards has brought
out Indian Standards on methods of test for soils both for laboratory and field. It has also been
recognized that reliable and comparable test results can be obtained only with standard testing
equipment capable of giving the desired level of accuracy. The Bureau is, therefore, brlnging out
series of Indian Standards covering specification of equipments used for testing of soils so as to
encourage the development and their manufacture in the country. All such Indian Standards
published so far have also been included in this compendium.
For convenience of reference and use, this compendium is being brought out in two parts. The first
part covers laboratory testing of soils for civil engineering purposes and this second part covers
standards on field testing, sampling and products. The Indian Standards in each part have been
arranged subjectwise details of which have been indicated in the contents. An index of Indian
Standards arranged serialwise has also been provided for easy location of any Indian Standard
covered in this compendium.
In reporting the result of test or analysis made in accordance with any of the Indian Standards, if
the final value, observed or calculated, is to be rounded off, it should be done in accordance with
IS 2 : 1960.
This publication covers Indian Standards issued up to 31 March 1988 and incorporates at the
appropriate place all the amendments issued up to that time.
List of standard\ I elcrred in this compendium is given in Annex A at the end
CONTENTS
Section Title Covering IS : Page
1. Subsurface Investigation IS 1892 : 1979 . . 3

for Foundations

2. Determination of Density IS 2720 (Part 33) : 1971 . . 29
IS 2720 (Part 34) : 1972 . . 34
IS 2720 (Part 29) : 1975 . . 37
IS 2720 (Part 28) : 1974 . . 40
3. Method of Load Test IS 1888 : 1982 . . 53
on Soils
4. Determination of Modulus IS 9214 : 1979 . . 61
of Subgrade Reaction
5. Standard Penetration Test IS 9640 : 1980 . . 75
IS 2131 : 1981 . . 78
6. Subsurface Sounding of Soils IS 10589 : 1983 . . 83
IS 4968 (Fart 1) : 1976 . . 90
IS 4968 (Part 2) : 1976 . . 92
7. Static Cone Penetration Test IS 4968 (Part 3) : 1976 . . 99
8. Vane Shear Test IS 4434 : 1978 . 107
9. Direct Shear Test IS JO042 : 1981 . . 117
IS 11593 : 1986 . . 126
IS 2720 (Part 39/Set 2) : 1979 . . 132
10. Determination of CBR IS 2720 (Part 31) : 1969 . . 141
IS 10379 : 1982 . . 146
11. Sampling of Soils IS 10442 : 1983 . . 151
IS 10108 : 1987 . . 153
IS 8763 : 1978 . . 160
IS 11594 : 1985 . 164
IS 2132 : 1986 . . 166
12. Soil Product IS 1725 : 1982 . . 171
INDEX
(According to Serial Order of IS No.)
Sl Indian Standard Page

m0.
1. IS 1725 : 1982 Specification for soil based blocks used in general building 171
construction (first revision)
2. IS 1888 : 1982 Method of load test on soils (second revision) 53

3. IS 1892 : 1979 Code of practice for subsurface investigation for foundations 3
(first revision)
4. IS 2131 : 1981 Method for standard penetration test for soils (first revision) 78
5. IS 2132 : 1986 Code of practice for thin walled tube sampling of soils (second revision) 166
6. IS 2720 (Part 28) : 1974 Methods of test for soils, Part 28 Determination of dry density 40
of soils in-place, by the sand replacement method (first revision)
7. IS 2720 (Part 29) : 1975 Methods of test for soils, Part 29 Determination of dry density 37
of soils, in-place, by the core-cutter method (first revision)

8. IS 2720 (Part 31) : 1969 Methods of test for soils, Part 31 Field determination of 141
California bearing ratio
9. IS 2720 (Part 33) : 1971 Methods of test for soils, Part 33 Determination of the density 29
in-place by the ring and water replacement method
10. IS 2720 (Part 34) : 1972 Methods of test for soils, Part 34 Determination of density of 34
soil in-place by rubber-balloon method
11. IS 2720 (Part 39/Set 2) : 1979 Methods of test for soils, Part 39Direct shear test for 132
soils containing gravel, Section 2 In-situ shear test
12. IS 4434 : 1978 Code of practice for in-situ vane shear test for soils (first revision) 107
13. IS 4968 (Part 1) : 1976 Method for subsurface sounding for soils, Part 1 Dynamic 90
method using 50 mm cone without bentonite slurry (first revision)
14. IS 4968 (Part 2) : 1976 Method for subsurface sounding for soils, Part 2 Dynamic 92
method using cone and bentonite slurry (first revision)
15. IS 4968 (Part 3) : 1976 Method for subsurface sounding for soils, Part 3 Static cone 99
penetration test (first revision)
16. IS 8763 : 1978 Guide for undisturbed sampling of sands 160
17. IS 9214 : 1979 Method of determination of modulus of subgrade reaction (K-value) 61

of soils in field
18. IS 9640 : 1980 Specification for split spoon sampler 75
19. IS 10042 : 1981 Code of practice for site investigations for foundation in gravel- 117
boulder deposit
20. IS 10108 : 1982 Code of practice for sampling of soils by thin wall sampler with 153
stationary piston
21. IS 10379 : 1982 Code of practice for field control of moisture and compaction of soils 146
for embankment and subgrade
22. IS 10442 : 1983 Specification for earth augers (spiral type) 151
23. IS 10589 : 1983 Specification for equipment for subsurface sounding of soils 83
24. IS 11593 : 1986 Specification for shear box (large) for testing of soils 126
25. IS 11594 : 1985 Specification for mild steel thin-walled sampling tubes and sampler 164
heads
for Foundations
I
SECTION
Investigation
Subsurface
As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank
18 1892 : 1979
(Reaffirmed
1987)
Indian Standard
CODE OF PRACTICE FOR SUBSURFACE INVESTIGATION
FOR FOUNDATIONS
(First Revision)
0. FOREWORD 1. SCOPE
0.1 A detailed investigation for site is essential 1.1 This code deals mainly with subsurface
before a design can be finalized. The object of investigations for foundations of multi-storeyed
subsurface and related site investigation is to buildings to determine:
provide the engineer or architect with as much a) sequence and extent of each soil and rock
information as possible about the existing stratum in the region likely to be affected

conditions, for example, the exposed overburdln, by the proposed work;
the course of a stream nearby, a rock outcrop or a
b) nature of each stratum and engineering
hillock, vegetation, and other geological features
properties of soil and rock which may af-
of the area. It is equally important to know the
fect design, and mode of construction of
subsoil conditions below a proposed structure.
proposed structures and their foundations;
0.1.1 The methods of subsurface investigation and
enable vertical sections of the strata to be drawn C) location of ground water, and possible cor-
and samples to be tested, on the site or in 2 rosive effects of soil and water on founda-
laboratory for determining shear strength tion materials.
parameters, bearing capacity of the soil,
1.1.1 44spects relating to procuring
permeability, water table, type classification and
representative samples of the soils and rocks,
other geophysical information in the field. This
obtaining general information on geology,
information, together with the normal
seismicity of the area, surface drainage, etc, and
topographical survey, provides the engineer with
subsurface investigations for availability of
complete details of the site and enables him to
construction materials are also mentioned briefly.
prepare economical designs for the foundations.
1.1.2 Most of the provisions of this code are
0.1.2 Proper inspection and guidance in boring
also applicable to subsurface investigation of
operations and investigations are essential to tanks,
underground and overhead water
ensure that the required data are obtained.
swimming pools and (abutments of) bridges, roads
0.2 Because of the complexity of natural deposits, and air fields.
no one method of exploration is best for all
2. GENERAL
situations. The choice depends upon the nature of
the material and on the purpose of the exploratory 2.1 In areas which have already been developed
programme. This code is intended to summarize in advantage should be taken of existing local
a convenient form the information available so knowledge, records of trial pits, bore holes, etc.,
that the desirable information may be obtained. in the vicinity, and the behaviour of existing
Tht? code has been prepared in relation to structures, particularly those of a nature similar to
conditions and practices existing in India. This that of the proposed structure. In such cases,
standard was published in 1962. Based on further exploration may be limited to checking that the
data collected in past 18 years, this revision has expected soil conditions are those as in the
been prepared. neighbourhood .
0.3 Though this code is mainly intended to cover 2.2 If the existing information is not sufficient OI
subsurface investigation for foundations of is inconclusive, the site should be explored in detail
multi-storeyed buildings, most of the provisions so as to obtain a knowledge of ‘the type,
are generally applicable to other civil engineering uniformity, consistence, thickness, sequence and
works, such as roads, air fields, bridges and marine dip of the strata, and of the ground water
works. conditions.
COMPENDIUM OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERING - PART 2 3

IS1892 : 1979
,2.2.1 Site Reconn&sance - Site retinnaissance new works. This is particularly so in areas where
would help in deciding future programme of field there have been underground workings, such as
investigations, that is, to assess the need for worked-out ballast pits, quarries, old brick fields,
preliminary or detailed investigations. This would coal mines and mineral workings. Enquiries
also help in determining.scope of work, methods should be made regarding the location of shafts
of exploration to be adopted, field tests to be and workings, particularly shallow ones, where
carried out and administrative arrangements there may be danger of collapse, if heavy new
required for the investigation. Where detailed structures are superimposed.
published information on the geotechnical
conditions is not available, an inspection of site 2.2.2.1 The possibility bf damage to sewers,
and study of topographical features are helpful in conduits and drainage systems by subsidence
setting information about Soil, rock and should also be investigated.
ground-water conditions. Site reconnaissance 2.2.3 Geophysical investigations of the site may
includes a study of local topography, excavations, be conducted at the reconnaissance stage since it
ravines, quarries, escarpments; evidence of provides a simple and quick means of getting
erosion or landslides, behaviour of existing useful information about stratifications.
structures at 01 near the site; water level in Depending on these information, detailed subsoil

streams, water courses and wells; flood marks; exploration should be planned. Important
nature of vegetation; drainage pattern, location of geophysical methods available for subsoil
seeps, springs and swamps. Ixiformation on some exploration are:
of these may be. obtained from topographical
a) Electrical resistivity method, and
maps, geological maps, pedological and soil survey
maps, and aerial photographs. b) Seismic method.
2.2.1.1 Data regarding rem&al of 2.2.3.1 Electrical resistivity method - The

overburden by excavation, erosion or landslides electrical resistivity method, in which the
should be obtained. This gives an idea of the resistance to the flow of an electric current through
amount of pre-consolidation the soil strata has the subsurface materials is measured at intervals
undergone. Similarly, data regarding recent fills is of the ground surface, may be useful for the study
also important to study the consolidation of foundation problems and particularly for
characteristics of the fill as well as the original finding rock strata under deep soil cover.
strata. 2.2.3.2 Seismic method - The seismic
2.2.1.2 The type of flora affords at times method makes use of the variation of elastic
some indication of the nature of the soil. The properties of the strata which affect the velocity of
extent of swamp, and superficial deposits and shock waves travelling through them, thus
peats will usually be obvious. In general, such providing a usable tool for dynamic elastic moduli
indications, while worth noting, require to be determinations in addition to the mapping of the
confirmed by actual exploration. subsurface horizons. The required shock waves
.
can be generated by hammer blows on the ground
2.2.1.3 Ground-water conditions - The or by detonating a small charge of explosives. This
ground-water level fluctuates, and will depend method is quite useful in delineating the bedrock
upon the permeability of the strata and the head
configuration and the geological structures in the
causing the water to flow. The water level in
subsurface.
streams and water courses, if any in the
neighbourhood, should be noted, but it may be 2.3 Outline of Procedure
misleading to take this as an indication of the depth
2.3.1 Number and Disposition of Trial Pits and
of the water table in the ground. Wells at the site Borings - The disposition and spacing of the trial
or in the vicinity give useful indications of the
pits and borings should be such as to reveal any
ground-water conditions. Flood marks of rivers
major changes in thickness, depth or properties of
may indicate former highest water levels. Tidal the strata over the base area of the structure and its
fluctuations may be of importance. There is also a
immediate surroundings. The number and spacing
possibility of several water tables at different
of bore holes or trial pits will depend upon the
levels, separated by impermeable stiata, and some
extent of the site and the nature of structures
of this water may be subject to artesian head.
coming on it. For a compact building site covering
2.2.2 Enquiries Regarding Earlier Use of the an area of about 0.4 hectare, one bore hole or trial
Site-In certain cases, the earlier uses of the Site pit in each corner and one in the centre should be
may have a very important bearing on proposed adequate. For smaller and less important buildings
4 COMl!ENDIUM OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERING - PART 2

IS 1892 : 1979
even oneborehole or &a\&‘nl‘the cenheVA TABLE1 DEPTROFEXPLORA’DON

suffice. For very large areas covering industrial (Clause 2.3.2.1)
and residential colonies, the geological nature of SL TYPEOFFOUNDATION DEFTH OFEXPLORATION
the terrain will help in deciding the number of bore No. (D)
holes or trials pits. Cone penetration tests may be i) Isolated spread footing One and a half times the
performed at every 50 m by dividing the area in a or raft width (B) (seeFig. 1)
ii) Adjacent footing with One and a half times, the
grid pattern and number of bore holes or trial p&s clear spacing less than length(L) of the footing.
decided by examining the variation in the twice the width (seeFig 1)
penetration curves. The cone penetration tests iii) Adjacent rows of footings See Fig. 1
may not be possible at sites having gravelly or iv) Pile and well foundations To a depth of one and a half
boulderous strata. In such cases, geophysical times ‘thewidth of struct-
ure[from the bearing level
methods may be useful.
(toe of pile or bottom of
2.3.2 Depth of Exploration - The depth of well)
exploration required depends on the type of v) 1. Road cuts‘ Equal to the bottom width
proposed structure, its total weight, the size, shape of the cut
and disposition of the loaded areas, soil profile, 2. Fill Two metres below ground
level or equal to the height
and the physical properties of the soil that of the fill whichever is
constitutes each individual stratum. Normally, it greater
should be one and a half times the width of the

water-logged ground is undesirable because of its
footing below foundation level. In certain cases, it
low bearing capacity. On .sites liable to be
may be necessary to take at least one bore hole or
water-logged in wet weather, it xs desirable to
cone test or both to twice the width of the
determine the fluctuation of the water table in
foundation. If a number of loaded areas are in
order to ascertain the directions of the natural
close proximity, the effect of each is additive. In
drainage, and to obtain a clue to the design of
such cases, the whole of the area may be
intercepting drains to prevent the influx of ground
considered as loaded and exploration should be
water on to the site from higher ground. The
carried out up to one and a half times the lower
seasonal variation in the level of water table should
dimension. In weak soils, the exploration should
also be noted.
be continued to a depth at which the loads can be
ca’rried by the stratum in question without 2.4.2 If in the eariler stages of investigations,
undesirable settlement and shear failure. In any dewatering problems are anticipated a detailed
case, the depth to which seasonal variations affect study should be carried out to ascertain the rate of
the soil should be regarded as the minimum depth flow and seepage.
for the exploration of sites. But where industrial
processes affect the soil characteristics, this depth 2.4.3 For deep excavation, the location of
may be more. The presence of fast growing and water-bearing strata should be determined and the
water seeking trees also contributes to the water pressure observed in each, so that necessary
weathering processes. precautions may be taken during excavation, for
NOTE- cxampres ot tast growing and water seeking trees example, artesian water in deep strata may give
are Banyan (Ficus bengaknsist), Pipal (Ficus rekgiosa) and rise to considerable difficulties unless precautions
Neem (Azadirachta indica). are taken. An idea af the steady level of water
2.3.2.1 An estimate 6t the variation with should be obtained. Bore holes, which have been
depth of the vertical normal stress in the soil arising driven, may be used for this purpose, but since
from foundation loads may be made on the basis of water levels in bore holes may not reach
elastic theory. The net loading intensity at any equilibrium for some time after boring, these
level below a foundation may be obtained should be measured 12 to 24 hours after boring
approximately by assuming a spread of load of two and compared with water levels in wells that may
vertical to one horizontal from all sides of the be available in the area. It is seldom necessary to
foundations, due allowance being made for the make detailed ground-water observations in each
overlapping effects of load from closely spaced one of a group of closely spaced bore holes but
footings. The depth of exploration at the start of sufficient observations should be made to establish
the work may be decided as given in Table 1, the general shape of the ground-water table;
which may be modified as exploration proceeds, if however, observations should always be made in
required. the first boring of the group. The minimum and
maximum ground-water levels should be obtained
2.4 Importance of Ground-Water Tables from local sources and wells in the area would also
2.4.1 For most types of construction, give useful information in this regard

IS 1892 : 1979
NOTE- For methods of determination of water level in a corrosion has previously occured. Jn such cases, a
bore hole, IS 6935 : 1973 and for methods of determination of chemical analysis of the soil should be made to
permeability of overburden, IS 5529 (Part 1) : 1969 may be
referred. assess the necessity of special precautions. Ground
water may be tested for its salt content, alkalinity
or acidity, etc, for its effect on foundations. For
the purpose of chemical analysis about 5 litres of
water should be collected from as near the bottom
of the bore hole or trial pit as possible and not from
the top. Water in the bore hole should be pumped
out completely and after 24 hours the water which
is collected in the bore hole should again be
pumped out and sample of water obtained as near
to the bottom as possible. This will prevent
,-A- B C
erroneous collection of water utilised in wash
D.ll,B FOR AsLB
boring which is not the natural ground water. The
water samples should be collected in plastic jerry
D.llL FOR A<28 cans filled up to the brim and should be air tight for

the purpose of chemical analysis in laboratory.
2.5.1 In industrial areas, corrosive action may

arise from industrial waste products that have been
dumped on the site. Samples of such individual
waste products should be collected and chemically
analyzed in the laboratoy .
2.6 Soil and Rocks - As the engineering
classification deals mainly with soil as a material of
construction, soil may be defined as that which
comprises accumulations of ‘solid particles, loose
or cohesive deposits, such as gravel, sand, silt, clay
D .A; B FOR A<28 or any combination thereof which is loose enough
to be removed with a spade or shovel in a drv or
D=3B FOR ,A>28
saturated state. Their depths may vary from deep
D.l;B FOR AqbB lying geologica! deposits to agricultural surface
soils. Correspondingly, the. term ‘rock’ may be
FIG. 1 DEPTHOFEXPLORATION applied to materials other than the above, that is,
natural beds or large hard fragments or original
’ 2.4.4 In making ground-water observations, it igneous, sedimentary or metamorphic formations.
should be remembered that in some localities there
2.6.1 Classlficanon and Identification of
may be one or more isolated bodies of water or Soils - For this purpose, IS 1498 : 1970 should
perched ground-water tables above the main
be referred.
ground-water table. The formation of perched
ground-water tables is caused by impervious strata
3. METHODS OF SITE EXPLORATION
which prevent the water from seeping down to the
main body of ground water. The difference in 3.1 General - Subsurface explorations should
water levels in bore holes spaced reasonably close generally be carried out in two stages, that is,
to one another would indicate a perched water preliminary and detailed.
table. 3.1.1 Preliminary Exploration - The scope of
2.5 Corrosive Soils, Waters and Emuents - In preliminary exploration is restricted to the
certain localities, ground water and soil may determination of depths, thickness, extent and
contain constituents in amounts sufficient to cause composition of each soil stratum, location of rock
damage to foundations of structures. Cement and ground water, and also to obtain approximate
concrete is liable to be attacked by water information regarding strength in compressibility
containing sulphates. Some soils have a corrosive of the various strata. When reconnaissance is not
action on metals, particularly on cast iron. due to possible, it is essential to carry out preliminary
either chemical 0; bacterial-agency, and enquiry investigation to decide the method of approach of
should be made* in the localitv to find if such investigation. During preliminary investigation,
6
IS1892 :l!V9
geophysical methods and tests with cone 3.3 Open Trial Pits - The method of exploring
penetrometres and sounding rods are useful by open trial pits consists of excavating trial pits at
guides. the site and thereby exposing the subsoil surface
thoroughly, enabling undisturbed samples to be
3.1.2 Detailed Exploration - Detailed investi- taken. The undisturbed samples may be obtained
gation follow preliminary investigation, and by driving sharp-edged thin-wall tubes into the
should be planned on the basis of .data obtained ground by gently hammering or pressure.
during reconnaissance and preliminary Alternately, hand-cut samples known as chunk
investigations. This plan may require review as the samples can be obtained. In sufficiently cohesive
investigations progress. The scope of detailed soil, undisturbed sample can be cut out and
exploration is ordinarily restricted to the trimmed to regular shapes, say a cube or a
determination of engineering properties of strata cylinder. Wrap the chunk samples with plastic
which are shown by preliminary exploration to be cloth, plastic paper (polythene film) or a waxed
critical. The object of detailed exploration is to paper painted on the outside with molten wax.
determine shear strength and compressibility of all Two additional layers of cloth and wax are
types of soils, density, density index, natural moisture required to perfectly seal the sample. If a soil is
content, and permeability. It may also be easily disturbed a firmly constructed wooden box,
necessary to determine the preconsolidation with lid and bottom removed, is kept around the

pressure of the strata from oedometer tests and to protruding sample block so as to leave a space of
determine the consolidation characteristics about 25 mm between the sample and sides of the
beyond preconsolidation pressure. Appropriate box. The space between the sample and the sides
shear tests should also be conducted on samples of the box is packed with moist saw dust or similar
subjected to ambient pressures beyond the packing material. The top of the sample is cut to
preconsolidation range also. The detailed size, cloth or paper and wax are applied, and then
investigation includes boring programme and the lids are fitted. This method should generally be
detailed sampling to determine these properties. used for small depths (up to 3 m), but for greater
Field tests which may be perfonr\ed are in-situ depths (over 6 m) and below grouna-water table,
vane shear tests and plate load tests. The field the method becomes expensive due to the expense
permeability test and the test for the determination of sheet piling or caissons which are required in
of dynamic properties of soils may also be such cases. Deep trial pits may be used to
conducted, where necessary. More advanced investigate open fissures, or to explore zones of
methods of logging of bore holes by radioactive weak rocks which would break up in the core
methods fall under the category of detailed barrel andare incapable of being recovered intact.
investigations. All in-situ tests are to be
3.4 Subsurface Soundings - The geophysical
supplemented by laboratory investigations. The
methods of reconnaissance are sometimes
various phases of currently used methods of
supplemented by penetrometer tests by cones. The
exploration and their mode of application are
cone penetrometer , apart from its use for
indicated in Appendix A.
delineation of rock strata, may also be utilized for
3.2 Geophysical Investigations - Geophysical correlation with more detailed borings of soil
surveys make use of differences in the physical characferistics like density, bearing capacity, etc.
properties like electrical conductivity and elastic Sounding methods consist of measuring the
moduli, density and magnetic susceptibility of variation & the resistance of the soil with depth by
geological formations in the area to investigate the means of a penetrometer and may be conducted
subsurface. These methods may be employed to either by the static or the dynamic methods [see
get .preliminary information on stratigraphy or IS 4968 (Part 1) : 1976, IS 4968 (Part 2) : 1976
complement a reduced boring programme by and IS 4968 (Part 3) : 19761. The soundings by
correlation of stratigraphy between widely spaced dynamic method may also be carried out in bore
bore holes. Of the four methods of geophysical holes using a standard sampler. The sampler used
surveys, namely, seismic, electrical, magnetic and and the procedure adopted shall be as specified in
gravity surveys; only seismic refraction and IS 2131 : 1963. The static cone penetration
electrical resistivity surveys are widely used. methods are not suitable for exploration of
Magnetic methods are occasionally used for boulderous or gravelly strata and in very stiff
detecting buried channels. dykes, ridges and cohesive soils. However, dynamic cone
intrusions in the subsurface rocks. A brief outline penetration methods may be conducted in such
of the seismic method and electrical resistivity area to give an idea about the compactness of
method is given in Appendix B. strata.
COMPENDIUM OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERING - PART 2 i

Is 1892: 1979
3.SExploratoryDrilling - Preliminary borings by up to the top level. Special care should be taken
augers, either power or hand driven, are quick and while withdrawing the shell to avoid sand boiling.
economical up to a depth of about 6 m in alluvial Start pouring the slurry into the casing pipe so that
deposits. They are difficult tp operate below the the sand boiling is avoided in the vacuum created
water table. When detailed information is not by withdrawing the shell. While boring, care shall
required, wash boring with chopping and jetting be taken to minimize disturbance to the deposits
may be utilized in cohesive and non-cohesive soils below the bottom of the bore hole. Disturbed soil
up to great depths. In the absence of casing, the of the deposits with all the constituent parts should
sides of the holes, where tequired, should be be recovered at regular intervals or whenever
stabilized with drilling fluid consisting of drilling there is a change of strata. These samples are
mud (see 3.6.5.1). In sandy soils, bentonite slurry suitable for conducting various identification tests
in the bore hole should be maintained at a level of in the laboratory.
1 to 1.5 m above the level of water table. In the 3.6.3 Percussion Boring (see Fig. 2) - This
wash boring method, changes in stratification can method consists of breaking up of the formation
be ascertained only by the rate of progress of the by repeated blows from a bit or a chisel. Water
drill or change in the colour of wash water or both. should be added to the hole at the time of boring
As the formation hardens, rotary drills, using and the debris baled out at intervals. The bit may
churning bits may be utilized. In gravelly

be suspended by a cable or rods from a walking
materials, percussion drilling ,with simultaneous beam or spudding device.
advance of casing is the only easy method of
advance. In hard and cemented formation like Where the boring is in soil or into soft rocks
rock, the hole is advanced with cutting edges using and provided that a sampler can be driven into
steel shots, hardened metal bits, tungsten carbide them, cores may be obtained at intervals using
or diamond bits. suitable tools; but in soils, the material tends to
become disturbed by the action of this method of
3.6 Borings boring and for this reason, the sample may not be
3.6.1 Auger Boring - An auger may be used as reliable as by the shell and auger method. As
for boring holes to a depth of about 6 m in soft these machines are devised for rapid drilling by
soil which can stand unsupported but it may also pulverizing the material, they are not suitable for
be used with lining tubes, if required. careful investigation. However, this is the only
Mechanically operated augers are suitable for method suitable for drilling bore holes in
gravelly soils or where a large number of holes are boulderous and gravelly strata.
to be made.
3.6.2 Shell and Auger Boring - A hand rig 3.6.4 Wash Boring (see Fig. 3) - In this
may be used for vertical boring up to 200 mm in dia method, water is forced under pressure through an
and 25 m in depth. In alluvial deposits, the depth inner tube which may be rotated or moved up and
of the bore hole may be extended up to 50 m with down inside a casing pipe. The lower end of the
a mechanized rig. The tool consists of augers for tube, fixed with sharp edge or a tool, cuts the soil
soft to stiff clay, shells for very stiff and hard clay which will be floated up through the casing pipe
and shells or sand pumps for sandy strata, attached aiound the tube. Tbe slurry flowing out gives an
to sectional boring rods. Small boulders and thin indication of the soil type. In this method, heavier
strata of rock may be broken up by a chisel bit particles of different soil layers remain under
attached to the boring rods. The boring rods are suspension in the casing pipe and get mixed up,
raised or lowered by means of shear legs and a and hence this method is not suitable for obtaining
winch, and are turned by hand. The casing is samples for classification. Whenever a change in
advanced by driving by means of a ‘monkey’ strata is indicated by the slurry flowing out,
suspended from a winch. washing should be stopped and a tube sampier
3.6.2.1 No water shall be added while boring should be attached to the end of the drill rod or the
through soft cohesive soils and cohesionless soils inner tube. Samples of the soil should be obtained
above water table. Bailers should be used to by driving the sampler into the soil by hammering
remove soil cuttings. In stiff cohesive soils, it may or jacking. Jacking or pulley method should be
be necessary to soak the bore hole before any used when undisturbed samples are required.
progress can be made. While boring through Initially fish-tail bit or pistol bits are used for
cohesionless deposits below water table, water in drilling bore hole up to weathered material. These
the casing shall always be maintained at or above bits should be replaced by tungsten carbide or
the water table. It is essential that the casing is diamond bits. Double tube-core barrels are
kept fullpf water or with 5 percent bentonite slurry recommended for drilling in weathered rock
8 COMPENDIUM OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERING - PART 2

IS 1892: 1979
CROWN SHEAVE
f
rMAST
SAND SHEAVE\ /
MAIN 01
CAI -SPUDDING SHEAVE
SAND L’ SPUDDING ARM

7.9 TO 98
I MAIN CABLE DRUM
SHAFT FOR SPUDDING
BAILER I ARM AND SPOOLING

SHEAVE
A’SINKER BAR’
SIMILAR TO BUT
m MUCH SHORTER ?-t
STEM SOMETIMES
SERTED HERE

! :’ / ‘SPUDDING CRANK CASING fl’
i ; COUPLING J 1
I L BASE ON SKIDS
I
I
’
I
-
AND CRIBBING OR
I ’
I
MOUNTED ON
: ’ TRUCK
’ :
: :
I I
I i
0 1
I ’I StURRY OF WATER
: ’ AND GROUND - UP
I ’ MATERIAL lN LOWE
SEE ENLARGED
; i DETAIL ‘A’ PART OF .HOLE
I J
CASING SHOE\
.ENLARGED DETAIL ‘A
FIG. 2 TYPICAL ARRANGEMENT OF PERCUSSION DRILLING
stratum with seaming shells and core catcher as carried at the end of hollow, jointed drill rods
required. which are rotated by a suitable chuck. A
mud-laden fluid or grout is pumped continuously
3.6.5 Rotary Boring down the hollow drill rods and the fluid returns to
the surface in the annular space between the rods
3.6.5.1 Mud-rotary drilling (see Fig. 4) - In and the side of the hole, and so the protective
this system, boring is effected by the cutting action casing may not be generally necessary. In this
of a rotating bit which should be kept in firm method, cores may be obtained by the use of
contact with the bottom of the hole. The bit is coring tools.
COMPENDIUMOFINDL4NSTANDARDSONSOILENGINEERING-PART2 9
lS1892: 1979
DERRICK,
4 LEGS OF PIPE
TEE, REPLACED BY
DRIVING HEAD WHEN
DRIVING CASING
L WEIGH7 FOR DRIVING DRILL

RODS WHEN WASH POINT
CASING> IS REPLACED BY SAMPLING
SPOON. LARGER WEIGHT
USED FOR DRIVING CASING

/WASH PIPE
(DRILL RODS)
CHOPPING BIT, REPL

BY SAMPLING SPOON
SAMPLING OPERATIO
FIG. 3 TYPICAL ARRANGEMENT FOR WASH BORING
3.6.5.2 Simplified mud-boring method - In’ little above the cutter, may be used. The trap
this method, the boring is advanced by a cutter consists of 80 to 100 cm long hollow cylinder having
fixed to drill rods which are rotating by means of a conical shape at bottom. Holes of 3 mm diameter
pipe wrench. Bentonite is pushed simultaneously are also drilled in the drill rod within the trap as
by a double piston pump. The slurry flowing out of well as in the conical portion of the trap. During
cutter bottom, mixes up with the cut soil and flows boring, gravel and kunkur rise a little and then
to the bore hole surface, settling tank and back to settle into the trap. With the provision of holes, no
the slurry tank. The process is continuous and the finer materials settle in the trap.
same slurry can be used several times. The drilling The small silt-sand stone or hard beds may be
tool is lowered slowly with the help of manually broken using conical or chisel-ended bits
operated winch fixed. on a tripod. After the connected with drill rod. The broken pieces can
boring is advanced up to the desired depth, subsequently be removed by means of the gravel
pumping of the slurry should be continued for 10 trap.
to 15 minutes.
In case gravel and kunkur are encountered, a 3.6.5.3 core drilling - Core drills shall be
gravel trap fitted with stays around the drill rod, a so designed that in sound rock, continuous
10 COMPENDIUMOFINDIANSTANDARDSONSOILENGINEERING-PART2
IS1892: 1979
TOWER MAST
-SWIVEL HOSE
II I\\ YOKE AND KELLY DRIVE
STAND PIPE HOSE

~-_______:_‘____,_
SPIDER
CASING
ulr DRILL PIPE
DRILL COLLAR
-4lIl
.kb DRILL BIT
FIG.~ TYPICALARRANGEMENTFORROTARY DRILLING
recovery of core is achieved. Water is circulated contact with the cutting bit and the formation,
down the hol1o.v rods, which returns outside them, holes inclined over 5” or 6” cannot be drilled
carrying the rock cuttings to the surface as sludge. satisfactorily. This system is different from other
These shall be retained as samples in traversing types of core drilling because the coarser cuttings
friable rock where cores cannot be recovered. It is do not return to the surface but are accumulated in
important to ensure that boulders or layers of a chip cup immediately above the bit and here the
cemented soils are not mistaken for bed rock. This chilled shot is used as an abrasive in place of the
necessitates core drilling to a depth of at least 3 m drilling head.
in bed rock in areas where boulders are known to
occur. For shear strength determination, a core 3.7 Pressure Meter - A pressure meter (see
with diameter to height ratio of 1: 1 is required. Fig. 5) applies a uniform radial stress to the bore
Rock pieces may be used for determination of hole at any desired depth and measures
specific gravity and classification. consequent deformation. The test involves
3.6.5.4 Shot drilling - The system is used in lowering of an inflatable cyclindrical probe to the
large diameter holes that is over 150 mm. Due to test depth in a bore hole. The probe is inflated by
the necessity of maintaining the shots in adequate applying water pressure from a reservior. Under
COMPENDIUMOFINDIANSTANDARDSONSOILENGINEEdING-PART2 11
IS1892 :1979
PRESSURE GAUGE
GAS CYLINDER
PRESSURE ‘P’
6A Typical Pressure Meter Curve

DEFORMATION OF
BORE HOLE WALL=
FIG. 5 PRINCIPLE OF PRESSURE METER

pressure, it presses against the unlined wall of the
bore hole and causes volumetric deformation. The
stress on the bore hole wall is the pressure of water PO q
PRESSURE
applied. The deformation of the bore hole is read
in terms of volume corresponding to fall in water 6B CorrespondingCreep Diagram
level of the reservior. The readings are plotted as
shown in Fig. 6. FIG. 6 PRESSURE AND CREEP CURVES
3.8 Field Tests - Certain tests, if required, are to

be carried out on materials without actual removal 3.9 Choice of Method - The choice of the method
of the material from its existing positon. Dilatancy, depends on the following factors :
consistency, density, structure, colour and field a) Nature of Ground
identification should be carried out during 1) Soils - In clayey soils borings are
reconnaissance at preliminary investigation stage. suitable for deep expldration and pits for
shallow exploration. It is possible to take
3.8.1 Tests Which Measure Properties of the
representative undisturbed samples in both
Soil - These tests are :
cases.
a> Vertical loading tests (see IS 1888 : 1971)
In sandy soils, boring is easy but special
b) Deep penetration test - Standard
penetration test (see IS 2131 : 1963) and equipment such as, Bishop or Osterberg
Cone penetration tests [see IS 4968. (Part piston samplers, should be used for takirig
1) : 1976, IS 4968 (Part 2) : 1976 and IS undisturbed samples below the water
4968 (Part 3) : 19761 table. Such samples can however be readily
cl Vane shear tests (see IS 4434: 1978) taken in trial pits provided that, where
necessary, some form of ground water
4 Measurement of density of the soil [see IS
2720 (Part 38) : 1974 and IS 2720 (Part lowering is used.
39) : 19751 2) Rocks - Borings are suitable in hard
rocks and pits in soft rocks. Core borings
d Pressure meter test
are suitable for the identification of types
A brief note on the tests (a), (b) and (c) is of rocks but they provide braited data on
given in Appendix C. joints and fissures. NX bore hole camera is
12 COMPENDIUM
OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERING - PART 2
IS 1892 : 1979
useful to photograph the stratification in a) Cutting edge,

drilled bore holes. b) Inside wall friction, and
b) Topography - In hilly country the choice c) Non-return value.
between vertical openings (for example, 4.1.1 Cutting Edge - A typical cutting edge is
borings and trial pits) and horizontal shown in Fig. 7. It should embody the following
openings [for example, exploratory drifts features:
(see IS 4453 : 1980) ] may depend on the (C,) - The
4 Inside clearance internal
topography and the geological structure. diameter (0,) of the cutting edge should be
Steeply inclined strata and slopes are most slightly less than that of the sample tube (0.)
effectively explored by drifts or inclined to give inside clearance. The inside
borings and low dipping strata or gentle clearance, calculated as follows, should be
slopes by trial pits or vertical borings. between 1 and 3 percent of the internal
Swamps and areas overlain by water are diameter of the sample tube. This allows for
best explored by borings which may have elastic expansion of the soil as it enters the
to be put down from floating craft. tube, reduces frictional drag on the sample
c) Cost - For deep exploration, borings are from the wall of the tube and helps to retain
usual as deep shafts are costly. For shallow the core :
exploration in soil, the choice between pits D.-D_

and borings will depend on the nature of c, = s -c
the ground and the information required 0,

for shallow exploration in rock; the cost of b) Outside clearance (C,) - The outside
bringing a core drill to the site will only be diameter (D,) of the cutting edge should be
justified, if several holes are required; slightly lgrger than the outside diameter
otherwise trial pits will be more (DT) of the tube to give outside clearance.
economical. The outside clearance should not be much
greater than the inside clearance. This
3.9.1 Trial Pits and Shallow Bore
facilitates the withdrawal of the sampler
Holes - Trial pits are preferable to shallow bore
holes, since they enable sand and single strata to from the ground. The outside clearance
should be calculated as follows :
be seen in their undisturbed state and give a more
accurate idea of timbering and pumping that may Dw - DT
co = -
be required. Trial pits in stiff fissured clays aiso
DT
give fairly accurate idea of the depth of open
cl Area ratio (A3 - The area ratio, calculated
excavations or vertical cuts that can be carried out
as follows, should be kept as low as possible
without shoring. They also give a better picture of
consistent with the strength requirements of
the patchy ground where the soil lies in pockets. In
the sample tube. Its value should not be
case of gravels and sandy soils fines tend to be
greater than about 20 percent for’ stiff
washed out and the various layers are apt to
formations; for soft sensitive clays an area
become mixed as a result of ‘piping’ Hence it is
ratio of 10 percent or less should be
difficult in such cases to obtain representative
preferred. Where it is not possible to provide
samples and, unless proper precautions are taken,
sufficient inside clearance, pistion sampler
a misleading impression may be obtained. The
should preferably be used :
best procedure is to obtain samples from trial pits
D$ - D’,
dug after the ground water has been lowered by x 100 percent
A,= -2
means of wells or sumps with suitable filter linings. UC
4. SAMPLING TOOLS 4.1.2 Wall Friction- This can be reduced by :

4.0 General - To take undisturbed samples from a) suitable inside clearance,
bore holes properly designed sampling tools are b) a smooth finish to the sample tube, and
required. These differ for cohesive and c) oiling the tube properly.
non-cohesive soils and for rocks. 4.1.3 Non-return Valve- The valve should
have a large orifice to allow the air and water to
4.1 The fundamental requirement-of a sampling
escape quickly and easily when driving the
tool is that on being forced into the ground, it
sampler.
should cause as little displacement, remoulding
and disturbance as possible. The degree of 4.1.4 Recovery Ratio - For a satisfactory
disturbance is controlled by the following three undisturbed sample, taking into consideration the
features of its design : influence of the inside clearance [see 4.1.1 (a) ]

IS 1892 : 1979
correlate in-situ properties like density, shear

strength and bearing capacity.
4.2.1.3 Piston sampler - A piston sampler
consists of two separate parts: (a) the sample
cylinder, and (b) the piston system; the latter
SAMPLE TUBE
which is actuated separately fits tightly in the
sampler cylinder.
The single important control in the operation
of the piston sampler is the separate actuation of
the piston system, It may be done by separate
CUTTING SHOE drilling rods, or by a liquid pressure device or by a
special lock and wire-rope system.
During the driving and till the start of the
sampling operation, the bottom of the piston
should be flush with the cutting edge of the
sampler. At the desired sampling elevation, the

piston should be fixed in relation to the ground
and the sampler cylinder forced independently
FIG. 7 DETAILS OF CUTITNG EDGE into the ground, thus punching a sample out of the
soil.
when excess soil is prevented from entering the
tube, the recovery ratio calculated as follows The piston prevents water and dirt from
should be between 98 and 96 percent. entering the tube during the lowering operation. It
also serves to keep the recovery ratio constant
R, = &
during the punch. As the sampler tube slides past
where the tight fitting piston during the sampling
R, = recov&y ratio, operation, a negative pressure is developed above
L = length of the sample within the tube, the sample, which holds back the sample during
and withdrawal.
H = the depth of penetration of the sampl-
Both the sample cylinder and piston system
ing tube. should be finally withdrawn with the sample
4.2 Types of Samplers remaining in the sample cylinder.
4.2.1 Cohesive Materials 4.2.2 Cohesionless Materials
4.2.1.1 Open tube sampler - The open tube 4.2.2.1 In the case of either cohesionless
sampler is an ordinary seamless steel tube with its
materials such as silts and sands or soft soil strata,
lower edge chamfered to make penetration easy.
sampling operations are confronted with the
Subject to the requirements of undisturbed
possibility of the sample falling out of the sampler
sampling, an open tube sampler with a separate
due to lack of cohesion; this is specially so with
cutting shoe may also be used. The sampler head
increasing diameter of sampling tubes. Hence
which connects the tube to the boring rod is
some form of positive control should be
provided with vents to permit water to escape
mcorporated at the top and/or bottom of the
when sampling under water and check valve to
sampling device. This is affected in the following
help to retain the sample while withdrawing the
manner:
sampler (see IS 2132 : 1972)
4.2.1.2 Split spoon sampler - Split spoon 4 Control at the top of the sampler - A
sampler is a modified form of the open tube reduction of pressure on the sample is
sampler, in which the sampling tube is split into brought about by providing a bail valve in
two halves held together by the cutting edge and the sampler head or a properly packed free
the sampler head. This sampler makes the removal or stationary.piston in the sampling tube.
of the sample easier. b) Control at the bottom. of the
The split spoon sampler driven as specified in sampler - This control is achieved by:
IS 2131 : 1963, may be used in foundation 1) incorporating core retainers in the form
investigations to collect samples for visual of concealed springs, multiple flap valves,
identification and preliminary laboratory tests. claw-shell valves in the sample shoe or
This penetration results may be utilized to introducing core retainers attached to an
16 COMPENDRJM
OF INDIANSTANDARDS
ONSOIL ENGINEERING
- PART2
IS 1892: 1979
auxiliary barrel pushed down the sampler most strata to procure undisturbed samples which
after the drive; this will, however, disturb are very satisfactory for examination and testing
the samples to certain extent; and purposes. Undisturbed sampling of sand below the
2) maintenance of slight pressure below water table is not always an easy matter but special
the sampler by the injection of compressed methods have recently been developed for this
air into the space below the sampler purpose and used satisfactorily.
formed by the introduction of an auxiliary 6. PROCEDURE FOR TAKING SAMPLES
core barrel; IBishop sampler may be used.
6.1 Disturbed Soil Samples - Disturbed samples
cl Solidification by the introduction of of soi!s may be obtained in the course of-excavation
chemicals or emulsions - The and boring. The taking of disturbed samples of
solidification may be done at the bottom of clay may result in the remoulding of the material
the sampling tube after driving or a and may render it unsuitable for shear strength
sufficient volume of the strata to be measurements unless it is required for fill. Such
sampled may be solidified before the samples are suitable for mechanical analysis and
sampling operation starts. tests for index properties. These samples may not
4.2.3 Rocks - Cores of rock should be taken be truly representative, specially when taken from
by means of rotary drills with a coring bit. Other below the ground-water level. This is more so in

types of drills, such as shot drills may also be used the case of gravels containing a portion of fine
All types of rotary drills should be fitted with core sand, since the finer fractions tend to be washed
barrels and core catchers which break off the core off the sampler by the water. For procuring true
and retain it when the rods are withdrawn. Double samples, where possible, the ground-water level
tube core barrels should be used for ensuring may be lowered by means of pumping from filter
better core recovery and picking up soft seams or wells before procuring samples, or special type of
layers in bed rocks. samplers used (see 4.2.2). The quantity of sample
generally required for testing purposes is given in
5. METHODS OF SAMPLING Table 2 [see aiso IS 2720 (Part 1) : 1972 1.
5.1 Samples are of two types: 6.2 Undisturbed Soil Samples- Samples shall be
a) Disturbed Samples - These are taken by obtained in such a manner that moisture content
methods which modify or destroy the and structure do not get altered. These may be
natural structure of the material though, attained by careful protection and packing, and by
with suitable precautions, the natural the use of a correctly designed sampier.
moisture content can be preserved. 6.2.1 Clay - If strength of soft clay is to be
b) Undisturbed Samples - These are taken known, the sampling procedure may be
by methods which preserve the structure supplemented by in-situ tests like vane shear test
and properties of the material. Such (see IS 4434 : 1978) which gives a measure of the
samples are easily obtained from most shear strength of the soil.
rocks, but undisturbed samples of soil can
only be obtained by special methods.
TABLE 2 QUANTITY CDFSOIL SAMPLE REQUIRED
The following table indicates the methods that (Clause 6.1) a
are usually employed :
SL No. PURPOSE OFSAMPLE SOIL TYPE WEIGHTS OF
SAMPLE
Nature of Type of Method of
REQUIRED
Ground Sample Sampling
kg
Disturbed Hand samples i) Soil identification, Cohesive soils 1

I Auger samples (for natural moisture
example, in clays) content tests, mech-
1
Soil
Shell samples (for anical analysis and
index properties
example, in sand) Chemical tests 1 Sand and gravels 3
Undisturbed Chunk samples Cohewe soils 12.5
Tube samples ii) Compaction tests &d sands
Disturbed Wash samples from { Gravelly soils 25
Rock percussion or rotary iii) Comprehensive ex- Cohesive soils 25 to 50
drilling amination materials and sands
Undisturbed Cores including soil stabili- Gravelly soils 50t0100
zation
In cohesive soils of all types, it is possible with
COMPENDIUM OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERING - PART 2 IS

IS1892 : 1979
6.2.1.1 Chunk samples - Chunk samples done by another method which involves the use of
may be taken where clay is exposed in excavation. a thin-walled piston sampler and bentonite or
A block of clay should be carefully removed with a other types of drilling mud. The use of bentonite
sharp knife taking care that no water is allowed to or other drilling mud obviates the need for casing
come into contact with the sample and that ‘the pipes with thin wall samplers. In all methods, it is
sample is protected from exposure to direct sun essential to maintain the water or drilling mud in
and wind. The chunk sample should be coated the boring tube at or slightly above ground-water
with molten wax so that the layer of wax prevents level. This prevents any disturbance of the
escape of moisture from the sample. Chunk structure of the sand by the flow of water into the
samples are not suitable if those are to be bore hole.
transported to long distances because in such cases
the samples will get disturbed in transit. 6.3 Rock Samples
Undisturbed samples may also be obtained by 6.3.1 Disturbed Samples - The sludge from
means of a sampling tube of 10 cm internal
percussion borings or from rotary borings which
diameter provided with a cutting edge. In this
have failed to yield a core, may be taken as a
procedure the soil surrounding the outside of the disturbed sample. It may be recovered from
tube should be carefully removed while the tube is circulating water by settlement in a trough. The
being pushed in. rock type may be deduced by examining the
6.2.1.2 Core samples - The sampler should material of which the sludge is composed.

be lightly oiled or greased inside and outside to
reduce friction. It should then be attached to the 6.3.2 Undisturbed Samples
boring rods and lowered to the bottom of the bore 6.3.2.1 Block samples - Such samples taken
hole or trial pit. The sampler should be pushed from the rock formation shall be dressed to a size
into the clay by hand or by jacking. Where this is convenient for packing to about 90 x 75 x 50
not possible, the sampler may be driven into the mm.
clay by blows from a ‘monkey’. 6.3.2.2 Core samples - Cores of rock shall
The distance to which the sampler is driven be taken by means of rotary drills fitted with a
should be checked, because, if driven too far, the coring bit with core retainer, if warranted. Good
soil will be compressed in the sampler. A sampling core recovery (see 4.1.4) depends upon the correct
head with an ‘overdrive’ space will allow the operation and careful use of the equipment.
sample tube to be completely filled without sampling - In
6.3.2.3 Frequency of
damaging the sample. After driving the rods, the intermittent sampling, undisturbed soil samples
sampler should be rotated to break off the core
are obtained at every change in stratum and at
and the sampler should be steadily withdrawn. In intervals not exceeding 1.5 m within a continuous
soft clays and silty clays where samples are stratum. On important investigations such as the
required from below the water table, with water
foundations for an earth dam, continuous core
standing in the casing pipe, a piston sampler may sampling in any soft clay layers may be necessary.
be used with advantage.
6.2.1.3 For compression test samples, a core 6.4 Water Samples - If a trial pit has been
of 40 mm diameter and about 150 to 200 mm long excavated or a well exists near about the site of
may be sufficient; but for other laboratory tests, a exploration, the collection of water samples does
core of 75 to 100 mm diameter and preferably 300 not present any difficulty. However, if it is to be
mm long is necessary. The upper few millimetres collected from a bore hole made at the site, some
of both types of sample should be rejected as the difficulty is apprehended on account of the
soil at the bottom of the bore hole usually gets narrowness of the bore, caving-in of the sides, etc.
disturbed by the boring tools. In the latter case, therefore, it should suffice to
6.2.2 Sand - Comparatively undisturbed collect the water sample from the bore hole with
samples of moist sand above ground-water level the help of a common suction pump having a hose
may be taken from natural exposures, excavations pipe, rubber tubing, etc, which can be
or borings by gently forcing a sampling tube into conveniently lowered down into the bore hole,
the soil. Undisturbed samples of sand below connected at the suction end. The water may then
ground-water table may be obtained by the use of be collected into a clean vessel, allowed to settle
a compressed air sampler, which enables the and the supernatant liquid poured out into a clean
sample to be removed from the ground into an air well-rinsed glass or polyethylene bottle. The water
chamber and then lifted to the surface without samples may then be sent to the laboratory for -
contact with water in the bore hole. This may be chemical analysis.

IS1892 :1979
6.5 Records of Borings and .Trial Pits recognized as coming trom a specified trial pit or
6.5.1 Borings - In recording exploratory work boring. Suitable methods are given in AppendixE.
in connection with borings necessary information 7.2 Extrusion of Samples - Undisturbed samples
should be given, preferably on a record sheet of of soil retained in a liner or seamless tube sampler
the type given in Appendix D. A site plan showing which arrive in the testing laboratory, sealed with
the disposition of the borings should be attached wax at both ends, have to betaken out of the liners
to the records. Where a deep boring has deviated or tubes for actual testing. This should be done
from line, a plan and section should ‘accompany very carefully without causing any disturbance to
the record. the samples themselves. The wax may be chipped
off by a penknife. This may also be done by slightly
6.5.2 Trial Pits - Plans and sections, drawn to
warming the sides of the tube or liner at the ends
the largest convenient scale, should be provided.
when the wax will easily come off. If the tubes or
The following information should also be given :
liners are oiled inside before use, it is quite
a) Agency; possible for samples of certain moisture range to
b) Location with map and plan reference; be pushed out by means of suitably designed piston
c) Pit number; extruders. If the extruder is horizontal, there
d) Reduced level (RL) of ground surface or should be a support for the sample as it c6mes out
other reference point; from the tube so that it may not break. For screw
e) Dates, started and completed;

type extruders, the pushing head must be free from
f) Supervision; the screw shaft so that no troque is applied to the
g) Scales of plans and sections; soil sample in contact with the pushing head. All
h) Dimensions, types of sheeting and other extruding operations must be in one direction, that
materials of stabilization, method of is, from cutting edge to the head of the sample
advancing the exploration, such as by tube. For soft clay samples pushing with an
hand tools, blasting, boring, etc; extruder piston may result in shortening or
j) General description of strata met with; distortion of the sample. In such cases, the other
k) Position and attitude of contacts, faults, alternative is to cut the tube by means of a high
strong joints, slicken-sides, etc; speed hacksaw in proper test lengths and fill the
m) Inflow of water, methods of controlling testing moulds, by placing the cut portions directly
the water, required capacity of pumps; over the moulds and pushing the sample in with a
n) The level at which the subsoil water table suitable piston. After the sample is extruded, it
is met with; should be kept either in humidity chamber or in a
p) Dip and strike of bedding, and of desiccator and taken out only when actual testing
cleavage; and is carried out to avoid possible loss of moisture.
q) Any other information and remarks.
8. EXAMINATION AND TESTING OF
7. PROTECTION, HANDLING AND SAMPLES
LABELLING OF SAMPLES 8.1 The samples of soils and rocks are to be tested
7.1 Care should be taken in protection and in the laboratory for determining their engineering
handling of samples and in their full labelling SO properties. The various tests that are usually
that samples can be received in a fit state for necessary for different phases of exploration are
examination and testing and can be correctly given in Table 3.

IS1892: 1979
TABLE 3 TESTS FOR DIFFRRENT PHASES OF EXPtORATfON

(Clause
8,l)
PHASE OF EXPLORATION Tasn NECESSARYON A SAMPLE
.
r I
Type ofTest DetaiieoTests
i) Reconnaissance exploration Visual classification
( see IS 1498:1970’)
ii) Detailed exploration Physical testa Liquid and plastic limits
[ see IS 272D(Part 5) : 1970* ]
Grain size analysis
[ see IS 2720 (Part 4) : 19S3]
Specific gravity
[ see IS 272O(Bart 3):1980" ]
Natural moisture content
[ see IS 2720(Pan 1)i19@]
Unit Weight
[ see IS 2720(Part 3) : 196~ ]
Consolidation test (including preconsolidation pressure)
[ See IS 2720 (Part 15) i 1969 ]
Shear strength :
Unconfined [email protected]
[ see IS 27Zb(Part 10) : 1973’ ]
Triaxial cotirpression

[ see IS 272O(Part 11) : 1971s ]
Direct shear permeability test
[ see IS 2720(Part l3) : 19729]
Chemical tests Soluble salt content :
Chlorides and sulphates
[ see IS 2720 (Part 27) : 1977*’ ]
Calcium carbonate content (if warranted)
[ see IS 272O(Part 23) : 1976i1 ]
Organicmatter content (if warranted)
[ see IS 2720(Part 22) : 197212]
Ground water Chemical analysis including pH determination
[ see IS 272O(Part 26) : 1973i3 ]
Bacteriological analysis (if necessary)
Rock drilling Visual examination Petrographic analysis
Unit weight Compressive strength
Water absorption Shear strength
Porosity
lClassification and identification of soils for general engineering purposes (first revision).
,Methods of test for soils : Part 5 Determination of liquid and plastic limits (first revision).
Methods of test for soils : Part 4 Grain size analysis (first revision).
Methods of test for soils : Part 3 Determination of specific gravity (first revision).
5Methods of test for soils : Part 2 Determination of water c&tent (second revision).
6Methods of test for soils : Part 15 Determination of consolidation properties.
,Methods of test for soils : Part 19 Determination of unconfined compressive strength (first revision).
*Methods of test for soils : Part 11 Determination of shear strength parametres of a specimentested in unconsolidated undrained
triaxial compression without the measurement of pore water pressure.
,Methods of test for soils : Part 13 Direct shear test (firs? revision).
,&ethods of test for soils : Part 27 Determination of total soluble sulphates (first revision).
*iMethods of test for soils : Part 23 Determination of calcium carbonate (first revision).
,,Methods of test for soils : Part 22 Determination of organic matter (first revision).
rJMethods of test for soils : Part 26 Determination of pH values (first revision).
18 COMPENDIUM OF INDlAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERING - PART 2

IS1892 : 1979
APPENDIX A
(Clause 3.1.2)
CURRENT METHODS OF SUBSOIL
EXPLORATION
SI Method Mode of Operation Type of SI Method Mode of Operation Type of

No. Formation No. Fbrmation
A. RECONNAISSANCE METHODS 6) Simplified mud Manual rotation of Silts and sands or

i) Geophysical boring cutter fixed with drill mixed soils
rods by means of pipe specially below
1) Electrical resis- Measurement of vari- Alluvial de- wrench; simultan- water table
tivity method ations in the apparent positswea- eously pumping of
ac or dc) resistivity as mea- thered and bentonite slurry by
sured on the ground fissured rock, manually operating
buried channels a double piston
and ground pump. Chisel and
water gravel trap used for
2) Seismic refrac- Measurement of do hard bed, gravel and
tion method velocities of compress- kankars

ional waves from the 7) Wash boring Light chopping, Soft to stiff co-
travel time curves of strong jetting and hesive soils and
seismic waves removal of cuttings fine sand except
ii) Sounding by circulating water. gravel and boul-
3) a) Standard pene- Variations in the Change of stratifica- ders
Non-cohesive
tion could be guessed
tration test (see stratification is soils without
from the rate of pro-
IS 2131: 1963) correlated with the boulders
gress and colour of the
number of blows
wash water
required for unit
penetration of 8) Percussion Power chopping, Rocks and soils
standard penetro- drilling hammering and with boulders,
meter by a drive periodic removal of except clay or
hammer the slurry with bailers. loose sand
The strata could be
b) Staticcone The cone penetro- Primarily used in
identified from the
penetrometer meter is advanced by cohesive soils
slurry
test [see IS 4968 pushing and the static
(Part 3): 1976) force required for 9) Rotary drilling Power rotation of the Rocks, fissured
unit penetration is cor- coring bit which may rock and all soils
related to the engi- vary from metal bits except cobbles
neering properties to tungsten carbide or and boulders
like density, bearing diamond bits depend-
capacity, settlement, ing upon the hardness
stratification, etc. of formation (see
IS 6926: 1973 and IS
4 Dynamic cone The cone is driven by Primarily used in
5313: 1980)
penetrometer a standard hammer cohesive soils
test [see IS 4968 and the rest is as
(Part2):1976; in(b)
B. EXPLORATORY METHODS ii) Exploratory
i) Drilling Sampling
4) Shell and auger Using auger for soft All types of soils .10) Open tube sam- Driving standard Cohesive soils
clays and shell for specially soils of plkr and split sampler by a hammer and silts
firm to stiff clays; in mixed type tube sampler weighing 65.0 kg
sand to be used with through a drop of 750
casing for lining and mm (see IS 2131: 1963)
with bentonite: for
boring at depths if 11) Double tube Used with a rotary Coarse sand and
more than 25 m core barrels machine; non-rotat- gravels; most
power operator ing inner barrel of suitable for soft
winches are used swivel type slips over rocks like shale
5) Hand auger The auger is power or All soils except the sample and re- and any wea-
hand operated with sands and gravels tains it as the outer thered rock
periodic removal of above water bit advances (see IS formation
the cuttings table 6926 : 1973)

IS1892 : 1979
Sl Method Mode ofOperation Sl Method Mode of Operation Type of

No. Formation No. Formation
C. DETAILED INVESTIGATIONS 19) Load test Loading two dlBrY ttbcks
(rocks) pItice dlametriti~llfi
i) Undisturbed
t#Wciite each othei
Sampling
ad twd si& of a
12) Thin walled The tubes are jacked Soilsof medium t*tiefi, by means of a
tubes 50 to into a cleaned hole strength jack and measuring
125 mm under a static force t&i deflection near
(seeIS2132:1972) tb& sides
13) Piston type The tubes are jacked Clays and a&
sampler into a cleaned hole 20) Vane shear test Advancing a four- Soft and sensitive
under ‘astatic fotc~? wingedvane into a clays
fresh soil at desired
14) Samplers with do do
elevation and measur-
special core
ing the torque develop
retainers
ed in rotating the vane
15) Sand sampler The tubes are jacked Sand without (see IS 4434: 1978)
into a cleaned hole boulder

under a static force
(see IS 8763 : 1978) iii)bgghgof he
16) Solidification Solidification at the do iia;kaby
methods bottom of the sam- Geophysical
pler after jacking the Methods
sampler into soils
17) Open cuts and The sample is cut All types of Measurihg the poten- -
trenches from the sides and formations &I and resistances of
bottom of a trench formation by an
and sealed in a electrode system at
wooden box various elevations
ii) Bearing Capacity
22) Neutron Measuring the inten- -
Tests logging sity of scattered
18) Plate load test Loading a steel plate Clay and sandy radiation from a
(soils) at desired elevation formations system a\ desired
and measuring the elevation
settlement under
each load, until a 23) Gamma ray Measuring the
desired settlement logging intensity of scattered -
takes place or gamma radiatibn from
failure occurs a system at desired
(see IS 1888: 1971) ebvatloa
APPENDIX I3
(Clause 3.2)
OUTLINE OF SEISMIC AND ELECTRICAL
RESISTIVITY METHODS
moved away from the geophone to produce shock

B-l. SEISMIC METHOD
waves at given intervals. Some of the waves,
B-l.1 In this method shock waves are created into known as direct or primary waves, travel directly
the soil, at ground level or at a certain depth below from the shock point along the ground surface and
it, by striking a plate on the soil with a hammer or are picked up first by the geophone. If the subsoil
by exploding small charges in the soil. The comprises two or more distinct layers, some of the
radiating shock waves are picked up by the vibration primary waves travel downwards to the lower layer
detector (geophone) where the time of travel gets and get refracted at the surface. If the underlying
recorded. Either a number of geophones are layer is denser, the refracted waves travel much
arranged in a lipe or the shock producing device is faster. As the distance from the shock point and
20 COMPENDIUM OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGlNEERING - PART 2

IS1892 : 1979
the geophone increases, the refraeted waves reach the measurement and recording of changes in the
the geophone earlier than the direct waves. Figure mean resistivity or apparent specific resistance of
f$ shows the diagrammatical travel of the primary various soils. The resistiviq (p ohmsm) is usually
and refracted waves. The results are plotted on a detined as the resistance between opposite phases of a
graph as shown in Fig. 9, between distance verSu.s unit cube of the material. Each soil has its own
time af travel. The break in the curve represents resistivity depending upon water content, compaction
the point af simultaneous arrival of primary and and composition; for example, the resistivity is low for
saturated silt and high for loose dry gravel or solid
rock. The test is conducted by driving four metal
f 3m
GEOPHOWE
6 9 12 IS 1a 21 spikes to serve as electrodes into the ground along a
straight line at equal distances (see Fig. 10).
BATTERY MILLIAMMETER
f r
FIG. $ WAVE REFRACTION PRINCIPLE

FIG.~~ POSITIONOF ELECTRODES
B-2.1.1 A direct voltage is imposed between the

two outer potentiometer electrodes and the potential
DISTANCEIN METRES drop is measured between the inner electrodes. The
mean resistivity is given by the following formula:
FIG. 9 TIME-DISTANCE GRAPH P =2nDf
where
retracted waves and its distance is known as critical
P= mean resistivity (ohm. cm),
distance which is a function of the depth and the
D= distance between electrodes (cm),
velocity ratio of the strata. This method is effective
E= potential drop between inner
when the velocities successively increase with
electrodes (V), and
depth.
I = current flowing between outer
The various velocities for different materials is electrodes (A).
given below as a guide :
B-2.1.2 To correctly interpret the resistivity
data for knowing the nature and distribution of
Matbials Velocity, m/s
soil formations, it is necessary to make preliminary
Sand and top soil 180 to 365 trial on known formations. Average values of
Sandy clay 365 to 580 resistivity (p) for various rocks and minerals are
Gravel 490 to 790 given below :
Glacial till 550 to2 135
Material Mean Resistivity
Rock talus 400 to 760
ohm. m
Water in loose materials 1 400 to 1 830
Shale 790 to 3 350 Limestone (marble) 1o12
Sandstone 915 to2 740 Quartz 1o1O
Granite 3 050 to6 100 Rock salt lo6 -10’
Limestone 1 830 to6.100 Granite 5 000 -lo6
Sandstone 35 -4 000
Moraines 8 -4 000
Bc2, ELECTRlCAL RESISTIVITY METHOD
Limestones 120 - 400
B-2.1 The electrical resistivity method is based on Clays 1 - 120
COMPENDIUMOFlNDIAN ON SOIL ENGINEERING-PART

SI'ANDAHI~S 2 21
IS 1892: 1979
APPENDIX C
(Clause 3.8.1) l
FIELD TESTS TO MEASURE PROPERTIES

OF SOIL
C-l. VERTICAL LOADING TESTS under static or dynamic loading of different shaped
tools.
C-l.1 Loading tests may be used to determim
whether the proposed loadings on foundations and C-2.1.1 All the tests are empirical and their
subgrades are within safe limits, and subject to value lies in the amount of experience behind
certain limitations, to assess the likely settlement them.
of a structure. The greater the uniformity of the C-2.1.2 Dynamic penetration tests in bore holes
strata.tested, the more reliance may be placed on are the more usual and provide a very simple
the results obtained. means of comparing the results of different bore
Table 4 gives guidance regarding the methods holes on the same site and for obtaining an
indication of the bearing value of non-cohesive

of estimating bearing capacity and settlement of
structures for various types of soils. soils which cannot easily be assessed in any other
manner. The standard penetration test is the most
widely used of these tests (see IS 2131: 1963).
TABLE 4 METHODS OF ESTIMATION OF BEARING
CAPACITY AND SETTLEMENT C-2.2 Sounding Tests - Deep sounding tests are
SL TYPE OF STRATA METHODS OF ESTIMATION carried out by means of apparatus consisting of an
h
No. outer tube and an inner mandrel which can be
Ultimate Bearing Settlement of
driven by means of a hammer or caused to
Capacity Structures
penetrate steadily by an increasing dead load or by
1) a) Hard rocks L L
b) Soft rocks, such as FL L jacking. Measurements are made of the resistance
shales, weak hme- to penetration as the depth of penetration
stones and sand increases and the technique involves separate
stones measurement of the direct toe resistance and the
c) Non-cohesive soils FL F
skin resistance [ see IS 4968 (Part 1) : 1976,
d) Soft compressible LF LF
soils IS 4968 (Part 2) : 1976 and IS 4968 (Part
e) Stiff, fissured clays LF LF 3) : 19761.
2) Soft, compressible LF L
The method is used to determine the resistance
stratum overlying
hard stratum to the driving of bearing piles and as a rapid means
3) Hard stratum over- LF* L of preliminary site exploration and to supplement
lying compressible information obtained from borings.
stratum
4) Very variable strata Each case to be dealt with on its C-3. VANE TESTS
varyingin type thick- merits
C-3.1 The vane test has been shown to be a
ness and arrangement
promising non-empirical method of measuring the
NOTE - Methods are given in order of preference:
shear strength of soft clay in-situ at all depths from
F = Field load test
L = Laboratory tests : Compression and sliear the surface to at least 30 m. It is particularly useful
tests on undisturbed samples. in the measurement of strength in deep beds of
Consolidation test on undisturbed samples. soft sensitive clays.
Elastic modulus tests on undistuibed
samples. C-3.2 The shear strength of soft clays can be
‘measured in-situ by pushing into the clay a small
* Tests should be made on each stratum.
four-bladed vane, attached to the end of a rod and
then measuring the maximum torque necessary to
cause rotation. To a close approximation this
C-l.2 The method of conducting load tests on soils torque is equal to the moment developed by the
is described in IS 1888: 1971 shear strength of the clay acting over the surface of
C-2. DEEP PENETRATION TESTS the cylinder with a radius and height equal to that
C-2.1 Penetration Tests in Bore Holes-These tests of the vanes. The method of conducting vane test
consist of measuring the resistance to penetration is given in IS 4434: 1978.

APPENDIXD
(Chuse6.5_1)
RECORD OF MHHhFG

Name of Boring Organization
Bored for: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..i....................................... Location: Site

Ground surface level: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Boring No. : . . . . . . . . . ..f............................---.*.........-........
Type of boring: Wash boring Soil sampler used: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .._..__..
Diameter of boring: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Date started: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ._.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . _.. . . . . . . . . ._.. .
Inclination: Vertical Date completed: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Boring .. . . . .. .. .. . .. .. . . .. . . . .. . .. . . . .. .. . . .. . . . . .. . . . .. .. . . . . .. . .. . . .. .. Recorded: . .. .. .. . .. . . . .. .. . .. . . . . . .. . ... .. . .. .. . .. . . . .. .. .. . .. . .. . .. . . .. .. .
Samptes Ground-
Thickness Depth from R.L of
Soil LOWW
Description of Strata Ground Depth and Thickness
:lassificotion stPdttum Contact TYP* No. x;
Surfac*
I of Sample
:‘.j: i~~~~~“: .,L,:..L:,“:..‘:.:
.., ..: .., :.. ‘: :.‘.;.‘.:T? :‘e
. . ..::I: ::::‘y::
-.‘:...*.::: : .
.a... .- . ..C .i-. . :. .‘..,
-; ..,..’ . . . . .:. ..” .

..,.._. . . _:: 2.: . . . . .. *:::
..-....,r.: . . . . - . . . ...:
.:..:... ‘...‘. :.p :, i.,: y -1m -1m
.‘..,
. . . . ..‘.‘.’
. .;.. ;._.
Fine to medium
practically
sands
no binder
with
SP ‘*.,:...::: :....::*.::y Undls- I.4 m
.zi’_e:’ .. :;, :,.:.:_Q ::. turbed
.; :.-:._.__ ‘..‘.*; -1;:I,?.:
.:;..;:jI .i:_.;...‘.:,:
_ I
5
‘:.: :,
.
::.
- .
:..
.
;..*.....:.
. .. .‘_. .: 5 . _.. .
2m
....*:. :...(
..I..!. :; :t::‘.I...:::..::,:
_L’.\.:: .;‘.....
rrt;r
j ‘1,
2.7m
‘,;J/ g>::+ 3m -3m

,; ,,‘/; ‘,
j,‘/
/I’
/
‘,‘/
I/,‘/’ .,‘/
./,‘,
/, ‘,
/I,‘/: I ///‘,/
4m
:‘,;‘, “/
/‘/ ‘I//
‘I//, 4m ,-rr,,r
,I, /I, I ,%‘,I
1111,1
/ I I I / Not struck
“:/I’, ‘Y/J//,
.‘, ‘/I,/ 4.3m
’ u up to 6m
;’ ‘,’ depth
I
‘//,//
,2,/d ‘/I/,
‘// , I/,//
//
Silty cloys of medium Cl ‘// ‘// ’
;;‘C 5m -5.m
plasticity. No coarse. / /.‘I? / .‘,’ Undis-
/,‘/‘, J;; r ;/.
or medium sands K //,‘/,,‘/,H, turbed
//, //A/, I,
///I////.// 1
IS1892: 1979
APPENDIX E
(Clause 7.1)
HANDLING AND LABELLING OF SAMPLES
waxed paper should first be placed over the

E-l. HANDLING OF SAMPLES
ends of the sample.
E-l.1 Disturbed Shnples of Soil - Where Any space left between the end of the
samples are required for testing, or where it is liner or tube and the top of the wax should
desirable to keep them in good condition over long be tightly packed with saw dust or other
periods, they should be treated as follows : suitable material, and a close-fitting lid or
a) Immediately after being taken from the screwed cap be placed on each end of the
bore hole or trial pit, the sample should be tube or liner. The lids should, if necessary,
placed in a cloth bag, tin or preferably, a be held in position by adhesive tape. If the
glass jar of at least 0.5 kg capacity, and it longitudinal joint of the liner is not air-tight,
should fill this container with a minimum of this should be waxed and protected by
air space. The container should have an adhesive tape in the sam6 way as the lid.
air-tight cover. In this way the natural water b) Samples which are not retained in a tube
content of the sample can be maintained for should be wholly covered with several

one or two weeks without appreciable layers of molten paraffin wax immediately
change. after being removed from the sampling
b) The containers should be numbered and a tool, and then placed in a suitable metal
label as described in E-2 should be placed container, being tightly packed in the
immediately under the cover in a container. container with saw dust or other suitable
cl The containers should be carefully packed material. The lid of the container should be
in a stout wooden box (preferably with held in position by adhesive tape. If the
separate partitions) with saw dust or other sample is very porous, it may be necessary
suitable material to prevent damage during to cover it with waxed paper before
transit. applying the molten wax.
d) Where necessary, the samples should be cl label bearing the number of the sample,
A
tested for natural water content preferably of the type shown in E-2, should
immediately on arrival at the laboratory and be placed inside the container just under
an accurate description made of the sainple. the lid. It should be placed at the top of the
In such a case proper precautions should be sample. In addition, the number of the
taken to preserve the natural water content sample should be painted on the outside of
during sampling. During the interval, while the container and the top or bottom of the
the samples are awaiting transport, they sample should be indicated.
should be stored, if possible, in a cool room. 4 The liner or containers should be placed in
a stout wooden box, preferably with
E-l.2 Undisturbed Samples of Soil -The
separate partitions, and packed with saw
following conditions of handling and protection of dust, paper, etc, to prevent damage during
undisturbed samples are to be regarded as a
transit.
minimum requirement for samples taken by the
usual methods; in special cases, it may be 4 It is desirable to test the undisturbed
samples within two weeks of taking them
necessary to take more elaborate precautions: from the boring or trial pit, and during the
a) Samples which are retained in a liner or interval while awaiting transport and test,
which are retained in a seamless tube they should be stored, if possible, in a cool
sampler should receive the following room, preferably with a high humidity, say
treatment: 90 percent.
Immediately after being taken from the
E-l.3 Samples of Rock
boring or trial pit, the ends of the sample
should be cut and removed to a depth of E-1.3.1 Block Specimens - The reference
about 2.5 cm (or more in the top to cover number of the sample should be recorded on it
any obviously disturbed soil). Several layers either by painting directly on the surface of the
of molten wax should then be applied to specimen, or by attaching to the specimen a small
each end to give a plug about 2.5 cm thick. piece of surgical tape on which the number is
If the sample is very porous, a layer of written in Indian ink or indelible pencil. Samples

IS 1892: 1979
should then be wrapped in’several thicknesses of E-1.3.2.3 The properties of hard clays and soft
paper and packed in a wooden box. It is advisable rocks depend to some extent on their moisture
to include in the wrapping a label of the type content. Representative samples should therefore
described in E-2. be preserved by coating them completely with a
thick layer of wax after removing the softened
E-1.3.2 Cores - In the case of small diameter skin.
drill cores, it is usual to preserve the whole core.
This is best done in core boxes which are usually
E-2. LABELLING OF SAMPLES
1.5 m long and divided longitudinally by light
battens to hold 10 rows of cores. The box should E-2.1 All samples should be labelled immediately
be of such depth and the compartments of such after being taken from the bore hole or trial pit.
width that there canbe no movement of the cores
Records should be kept on a sheet of the type
when the box is closed. The lid of the box.should
shown below. These sheets are serially numbered
be adequately secured ( see IS 4078 : 1980 ).
and bound in book form in duplicate; Each’ sheet
E-1.3.2.1 Great care should be taken in carries a portion which may be detached along a
removing the core from the core barrel and in line of perforation and which is used as a label [see
placing it in the box to see that the core is not E-l.1 (b) and E-l.2 (c) 1. On this portion, the serial
turned end for end, but lies in its correct position. number of the sheet is repeated three timesso that
Depths below the surface of the ground should be the chance of its being defaced is diminished.
indicated at 1.5 m intervals by writing the depth in

indelible pencil on a small block of wood which is
inserted in its correct position in the box. The BOUNDAT PERFORATED TEAR.
exact depth of any change of strata should be THISEDGE HERE OFF SLIP
\
shown in the same way. Where there is a failure to \
recover core, this should be recorded in the same
way. No. 1100 No. llo(
E-1.3.2.2 Where specimens are required for SAMPLE RECORD
examination or analysis, short lengths of core may Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .,. ., . . . Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
be split longitudinally by means of a special tool Boring No.. . . . . R.L. of groundsurface.. ...
known as core splitter. One-half of the specimen Positionof sample, from.. . .... . ...... ... .. ...
should remain preserved in the box. Large to.. . . . _.. ... . below ground surface No. 110
diameter drill cores are usually too heavy to be Container No.. . . .. . . . . ... Type of sample
treated in this way. Asta rule, they are laid out in
Disturbed/Undisturbed
natural sequences for examination on the ground.
Remarks :
Specimens required for detailed work may be
treated as block specimens (see E-1.3.1). Signed : No. 110
COMPENDIUM OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGlNEERING - PART 2 25

Determination of Density
SECTION 2
IS 2720 (Part 33) : 1971
(Reaffirmed 1978)
Indian Standard
METHODS OF TEST FOR SOILS
PART 33 DETERMINATION OF THE DENSITY IN-PLACE BY THE RING AND WATER
REPLACEMEN? METHOD
(Incorporating Amendment No. 11
0. FOREWORD size of the largest particle. The diameter usually

ranges between 0.5 and 2.5 m in multiples of
0.1 With a view to establishing uniform
0.5 m. The rings may be made of 4 to 8 mm mild
procedures for the determination of different
steel sheet, either in one unit (when smaller) or in
characteristics of soils and also to faciliate
segments (when bigger) with suitable provisions

comparative studies of results, the Indian
for assembling in the field. The rings may be of any
Standards Institution is bringihg out this standard
construction provided the inner surface is that of a
on methods of test for soils (IS 2720) which will be
right cylinder approximately 10 to 20 cm high and
published in parts. Thirty-one patis of this
horizontal flanges of 10 to 25 cm suitably varying
standard have been pubiished so far.
with the diameter of the ring. Stiffening flanges
0.2 This part (Part 33) deals with the shall be provided to resist distortion.
determination of dry density of soil in-place by the
2.2 Straightedge
water rep!acement method using a ring. The
in-place density of natural soil is needed for the 2.3 Plastics Film
determination of bearing capacity of soils, for the a) 0.1 mm thick, 2 to 4 m square (for small ’
purpose of stability analysis of nat(lral slopes, for diameter rings); and
the determination of pressures on underlying b) 0.2 mm thick, 4 to 8 m square (for large
strata for calculation of settlement, etc. In diameter rings).
compacted soils, the in-place density is needed to 2.4 Pointer Gauge Assembly and Supports
check the amount of compaction that the soil has - Horizontal bar with supports resting on or
undergone for comparison with design data. The outside the ring, fitted with an adjustable vertical
correct estimation of the in-place density of both pointer and lock nut.
natural and compacted soils is, therefore, of
importance. 2.5 Quick-Setting Plaster or Sand Filled Gunny
Bags
1. SCOPE
2.6 Apparatus for Delivering into the Hole,
1,l This standard (Part 33) covers the method for
Measuring and Removing the Volume of Water
determining the in-place density of a coarse
Required ,
grained soil including gravels, cobbles, boulders
and rock by the water replacement method using a 2,6.1 For small test holes, and for test holes
circular ring on the surface and a plastics film to located in sites which are riot readily accessible,
retain the watel (see Notes 1 and 2). the most convenient and economical method of
NOTE 1 - If desired, successive density tests may be delivering and measuring water may be by hand or
performed as the hole is progressively deepened to determine by syphon hose from a small calibrated container
the variation of density with depth, for example, when placing (water can).
and compacting material in relatively thick layers. _
2.6.2 For larger test holes in readily accessible
NOTE 2 - A field grading of the excavated s&l. may, if
sites, it is usually advantageous to use one or more
desired, be done while the test hole is being excavated.
calibrated water tanks for measuring the water
1.1.1 The field dry density is determined either when filling the hole covered with plastics film,
for the total material or for the material smaller and to provide a portable, power driven, self
than a specified or given size. priming pump for removing the water after each
filling. Each calibrated tank should be provjded
2. APPARATUS
with an outlet valve and an attached volume
2.1 Density Ring and Steel Spikes (if required) - measuring gauge. Delivery holes from such tanks
The ring diameter shall hc at least 3 to 3 ti,mes the shall be fitted with ti valve at the delivery end so
COMPENDII!M OF INWAN S’TAXDARDS ON SOII. RNGlNEERIN<; - PART 2 29

IS 2720 (Part 33) : 1971
that the flow of water into .the hole covered with ring and the surface with quick-setting plaster. As
the plastics film can be suitably controlled when the plaster is setting, clean the surplus from the
the water level approaches the level of the pointer inside of the ring. Remove all loose material and
gauge. sharp projections from the test surface.
2.6.2.1 The area of each. calibrated tank 3.2.1 If required, sand-filled gunny bags may
should be such that the graduations on its voluine also be placed on the flange of the ring to prevent
measuring gauge can be easily read. Tanks used the movement of the ring.
for filling holes of large capacity should have
3.3 Set up the pointer gauge assembly so that the
volume gauges graduated at 10 and,1 litre intervals;
pointer can be removed and returned to a fixed
gauges on tanks used for filling holes of smaller
position below the top of the ring (see Note).
capacity should be graduated at 2 and 0.2 litre
Remove the pointer gauge bar to a safe position.
intervals.
NOTE - For small rings the pointer is often mounted on a
2.6.2.2 The graduations on the volume
datum bar supported on legs driven into the ground outside the
measuring gauges of calibrated tanks shall be ring. The datum should be made so that it can be removed
verified. To. verify the graduations Proceed as between readings, and replaced with the pointer in precisely
follows: the same position. For large rings, which are usually more
a) Fill each tank with water to the top gradua- stable, it is usual to lay a small datum bar on the rim of the ring

if it is a flat flange, marking the position so that the bar can be
tion on the gauge and draw off successive
returned accurately to the same position, or the bar may be
volumes so that the water level drops to suitably clamped to the ring.
each graduation in turn.
b) Calculate the volumes drawn off from the 3.4 After checking for punctures, spread the
weight of each withdrawal and compare plastics film over the test surface and the ring
with the volumes read on the gauge. taking care to remove all the wrinkles. Replace the
pointer gauge bar.
2.7 A Balance - capable of weighing up to 20 kg
(class C type of IS 1433: 1965), sensitiveness at no 3.5 Fill the plastics film-ring assembly with water
load and at full load 10 g, greatest error allowed to the precise level of the pointer (see Note 1).
when fully loaded 20 g (see Note under 2.9). While filling, ensure the film makes full contact
with the test surface and the inside surface of the
2.8 Apparatus for Moisture Content Determina-
ring. Check for leaks (see Note 2). The measured
tion - shdll be in accordance with IS 2720 (Part
volume of water used is the initial reading Vi for
2): 1973.
the test.
2.9 Platform Weighing Machine - capable of NOTE 1 - The required accuracy of volume measurement
weighing up to 100 kg (dial type) in accordance depends on the volume of the test hole‘and the diameter of the
with IS 1435: 1960, sensitiveness when fully loaded ring used. For smaller test holes and rings, record the volume
to the nearest 0.2 litre. For larger test holes and rings, a lesser
20 g, greatest error when fully loaded 40 g (see
accuracy may suffice. Since the test cannot be easily repeated,
Note). all observations and recordings should be independently
NOTE - Other types of weighing scales of similar accuracy checked.
may be used. NOTE 2 - Observe the water level at the pointer gauge tip
for several minutes to determine whether water is leaking
2.10 Containers through the plastic film. If leakage is occurring, repeat the
volume measurement with a sound film. Do not walk upon the
2.11 Suitable Hand Tools - for excavating and
plastics film or drag it across the ground or sharp projections.
cleaning holes in coarse soils and rocky materials,
such as pick, shovel, crowbar, broom and scoop. 3.6 Remove the pointer gauge bar to a safe
position. Remove the water and the plastics film,
2.12 IS Sieves - 100-mm, 80-mm, 40-mm,
checking the ground surface for indications of
25mm, 20-mm, lo-mm and 4.75-mm, 30 cm in
leakage.
diameter, as required.
3.7 Excavate, as nearly as practicable, a
2.13 Syphon Can and Measuring Cylinders
cylindrical cavity within the ring using the digging
3. PROCEDURE tools. When excavating very coarse materials, it
may be necessary to employ a mechanical device,
3.1 Approximately level the ground at the site of
such as a tripod with either a block and tackle or a
the test. Place the ring on therevelled ground and
chain hoist, for lifting large rocks from the cavity.
secure it to the surface to prevent any movement
Make the wall of the cavity as near vertical as
during the performance.of the test.
possible; but avoid under-cutting the ring and
3.2 Fill the voids between the underside of the deformation of the cavity. The movement ofheavy

IS 2720 (Part 33) : 1971
equipment in the immediate test area should not from calibrated tanks, run an exact number of
be permitted. Leave in place any large rocks near litres of water rapidly into the film-covered
the cavity boundary. Keep the floor and wall of the cavities, from a larger tank equipped with a
cavity as even as possible and free from sharp delivery hose capable of supplying the bulk of the
protrusions which may puncture the plastics film. water in a few minutes. A smaller tank may then
When the desired depth (see Note 1 under 1.1) has be used for slowly bringing the water level to the
been reached, clean all loose material from the tip of the pointer gauge and for obtaining the
cavity. Carefully collect all the excavated material required accuracy of the volume measurement.
in containers (see Note 1) and weigh each to the While filling, loosely support the sheet away from
nearest 0.1 kg. Sum the individual weights of the the wall of the cavity and allow the rising water to
material in the containers to obtain the total weight form the film to the shape of the cavity and the
( Ww) of the excavated material (see Note 2). ring. Check for leaks (see Note 2 under 3.5). The
NOTE 1 -Use containers with close fitting lids when measured volume of water used is the final reading
testing soils and absorbent rocks holding significant amounts of (Vf) for the test.
water. To avoid undue loss of moisture, the cover shall be kept
on the container at all times when the soil is not being placed in 3.11 The steps given in 3.1 to 3.10 complete the
it. In hot and dry climate, shade for the test area and a damp work specifically required at the test site to
cloth over the container shall be provided. When the material determine the in-place density.
consists predominantly of hard, non-absorbent rock of
negligible moisture content, open containers are satisfactory. 3.12 If a soil contains particles larger than a given
size and only the density of the material smaller

NOTE 2 - If practicable large rocks in excess of scale
capacity may be broken into smaller pieces. Alternatively, than this size is required, proceed as in 3.12.1
their volume may be determined by water displacement an,d to 3.12.3.
their weight computed using the specific gravity of the stone. If
larger rocks are broken, it shall be ensured that all fragments 3.12.1 Sieve the material excavated from the
from each rock ‘are weighed. cavity. Determine the weight W, and volume Vr of
3.7.1 The gradation of particles in the stones retained on the sieve.
excavated material may be determined, if desired, 3.12.2 The volume V, of the stones in the
by sieving it through sieves specified in 2.12. sample may be determined directly by
3.8 When the moisture content of all or part of the displacement of water from a graduated flask or
material will have a significant effect on the field syphon can from which the overflow can be
dry density, determine the moisture content of the accurately measured or by weighing the stones, or
soil in accordance with IS 2720 (Part 2) : 1973. by weighing the stones in air and water, calculatipg
their specific gravity (see Note) and determining
3.8.1 The sample for moisture content shall be their volume by dividing their weight by their
representative of the whole of the soil excavated specific gravity.
except that, if only the density of the material
NOTE -‘For construction control, the volume of stones
smaller than a given size is required, any stone need not be measured every time a test is made. From the
coarser than this size shall first be removed. The experience gained after a number of successive tests, if it is
moisture sample should be as large as is practicable found that the specific gravity of stones from particular source
and convenient. It should be collected in an is constant, a suitable value for the specific gravity may be
airtight assumed and the volume computed by obtaining the weight of
moisture content container by
stones in a wet surface-dry condition and dividing the weight by
incrementally sampling the excavated soil during the assumed specific gravity of the stone.
the course of the digging operations and after the
increments of W, (see 3.7) have been weighed. In 3.12.3 Calculate the dry density Yd of the soil -
taking moisture content sub-samples of soil from the formula :
containing coarse rock fragments, neglect rocks
larger than SO mm if these are predominantly
Yd =
ww-w,
non-absorbent and in surface dry condition.
(V-V,) (1 + j&J
3.9 After checking for punctures, and taking care
to remove all wrinkles, spread the plastics film where
properly into the cavrty thus formed. Replace the
pointer gauge bar. W, = total weight of the material excavated
to form the cavity,
3.10 Fill the cavity-covered with plastics film with W, = total weight of the portion (stones) of
water to the precise level of the pointer as set for the excavated material retained on a
the initial volume measurement (.ree Note 1 under given sieve,
3.5). When delivering water to larger test cavities V = volume of the cavity,
IS 2720 (Part 33) : 1971
v, = volume of the stones in the excavated 4.3 Calculate the dry density of the soil Yd from
material retained on the given sieve, the formula
and
W’ = moisture content of material finer
than the given sieve determined in
accordance with IS 2720 (Part 2) : where
1973. Y = wet density of the soil (see 4.2), and
W = the moisture content in percent of the
If there is a large proportion of stone in the soil determined in accordance with
sample, the calculated density value for the IS 2720 (Part 2) : 1973 (see also3.8.1
fraction passing the given sieve may lack physical and 3.12).
significance.
4. CALCULATIONS 5. REPORTING OF RESULTS
4.1 Calculate the volume of the cavity V from the 5.1 The results of the test shall be suitably
formula : reported and the report shall specifically mention
V = Vf - Vi about the following. A recommended proforma
where for the record of test results is given in Appendix

V, = final volume reading (see 3. lo), and A:
Vi = initial volume reading (see 3.5). a) The date of the test,
4.2 Calculate the wet density of the soil Y from b) The test location,
the formula c) The elev?tion of the test,
d) The soil description,
’ y+
e) The method used,
f) The fraction of the soil for which the density
where has been determined, and
w, = weight of the wet material from the g) The dry density in kg/m3 to the nearest 10
cavity (see 3.7), and kg/m3 or in g/cm3 to the second place of
v = volumk bf the cavity (see 4.1). decimals.
APPENDIX A
(Clause 5.1)
DETERMINATION OF DENSITY OF SOIL IN-PLACE BY RING AND WATER
REPLACEMENT METHOD
Test No. :
Elevation of test location :
Test location :
Soil description :
Fraction of soil for which density is determined :
DETERMINATIONOF VOLUMEOFCAVITY
Initial volume reading (with ring only) Vi Final volume reading (with ring arid cavity) vf
Initial Final Difference Initial Final Difference

reading reading Vi reading reading Vf
Volume of cavity V = Vf - Vi
32 C<)MPENDII!M OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENCIN XRING - PART 2

IS 2720 (Part 33) : 1971
DENSITY OF OVERALL MATERIAL
I I I I I I
No. of container
Weight of container + wet material I I I I I I
Weight of container
Weight of wet material
Total weight of wet material = W, Moisture content of portion for

which density is determined, w, percent
Volume of cavity =v
W
Wet density
y=v

Dry density
GRADATION OF EXCAVATED MATERIAL

I I I I I I
IS Sieve Size (mm)
Percent retained
Size
Gradation of stones
larger than 100 mm Percent of
total material
33
COMPENDIU:MOF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOII. ENGIl%F:ERlNG - PART 2
IS 2720 (Part.34) : 1972
(Reaffirmed 1978)
Indian Standard
PART 34 DETERMINATION OF DENSITY OF SOIL
IN-PLACE BY RUBBER-BALLOON METHOD
(Incorporating Amendment No. 1)
0. FOREWORD and size that it will not cause distortion of the

0.1 With a view to establishing uniform excavated test hole and adjacent test area during
procedures for the .determination of different the performance of the test. Provision may be
characteristics of soils and also for facilitating made for placing weights (surcharge) on the
comparative studies of the results, the Indian apparatus, if necessary, when the weight of the
apparatus itself is not sufficient to hold it down

Standards Institution is bringlng out this standard
on methods of test for soils (IS 2720) which is being during the test. The flexible membranes shall be of
published in parts. This part deals with the such sizes as to fill the test holes completely
procedure for the determination of the density without wrinkles cr folds when inflated within the
in-place of compacted or firmaly bonded soil using test holes, and their strength shall be sufficient to
a rubber-balloon apparatus. The in-place density withstand such pressures as are necessary to ensure
of natural soil is needed for the determination of complete filling of the test holes (see Note 2).
bearing capacity of soils, for the purpose of NOTE 1 - Any arrangement for providing pressure and partial
stability analysis of natural slopes, for the vacuum w_hichdoes not impair the portability of the apparatus
may be used. A convenient method is to use a pressure acfuator
determination of pressures on underlying strata
bulb similar to the one used in the blood-pressure measuring
for calculation of settlement, etc. In compacted apparatus used by doctors. By providing suitable valves and
soils the in-place density is needed to check the other arrangements the same actuator can be used for creating
amount of compaction that the soil has undergone the required vacuum.
for comparison with design data. SOTE 2 - The description and requirements given in 2.1 are
intended to be non-restrictive. Any apparatus using a flexible
1. SCOPE membrane (rubber) and liquid that can be used to measure the
1.1 This standard (Part 34) covers the procedure volume of a test hole in soil under the conditions of this method
to an accuracy within 1.Opercent is satisfactory.
for determining the density in-place of compacted
or firmly bonded soil using a rubber-balloon 2.2 Balances - A balance or scale of’ approxi-
apparatus. This method is not suitable for very soft mately 20 kg capacity accurate to 1 g and a balance
soi,ls which will deform under slight pressure or in of 2 kg capacity accurate to 0.2 g.
which the volume of the hole cannot be maintained
2.3 Apparatus for the Determination of Moisture
at a constant value.
Content - shall be in accordance with IS 2720
2. APPARATUS (Part 2) : 1973.
2.1 Calibrated Vessel - designed to contain a 2.4 Miscellaneous Equipment - Small pick,
liquid with a relatively thin, flexible elastic chisels, spoons for digging test holes, plastic bags,
membrane (rubber-balloon) for measuring the buckets with lids, or other suitable metal
volume of the test hole under the conditons of this containers that can be closed for retaining the soil
method (see Fig. 1). The calibrated equipment taken from the test holes, thermometer for
may also be a graduated glass cylinder provided determining temperature of water, small paint
with a suitable guard and guard base with provision brush.
for attachment of the elastic membrane without
leakage. The graduations shall be such that the 3. CALIBRATION CHECK OF VOLUME
volumes can be read accurate to 5 ml. The appara- INDICATOR
tus shall be equipped so that an externally con- 3.1 Verify the procedure to be used and the
trolled pressure or partial vacuum can be applied accuracy of the volume indicator by using the
to the contained liquid (see Note 1). Suitable apparatus to measure containers or moulds of
provision shall also be made for the measurement determinable volume that dimensiol,ally simulate
of the pressure applied. It shall be of such weight test holes that will be used in the field. The
34 COMPENDIUM OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL. ENGINEERING - PART Z

IS 2720 (Part 34) : 1972
at the observed temperature, taken from Table 1.

Repeat this procedure until three values are
secured for the volume of the container having
maximum range of variation of 3 ml. Repeat the
procedure for each of the containers to be used in
the calibration check.
3.1.2 Calibration Check Tests - Place the
rubber-balloon apparatus filled with water to the
required level (see Note 1) on a relatively smooth
horizontal Surface and take an initial reading on
the volume indicator. Transfer the apparatus to
one of the containers and take the reading on the
volume indicator when the rubber-balloon
completely fills the container (see Notes 2 and 3).
Apply pressure to the liquid in the apparatus until
there is no further change indicated on the volume
indicator. Note and record the pressure. Where
FLEXIBLE YEYSRANE
(RUSSER~*LLOON)
necessary, add weight (surcharge) to the apparatus
VOa To SE FILLED
WHEN EXTERWL to prevent it from rising (see Note 4). Note and

PRESSURE IS APPLIED FIELD TEST HOLE
record the total amount of weights added. The
difference between the initial and final readings of
the volume indicator is the indicator volume value
FIG.~ SCHEMATIC DRAWING OFCALIBRATED
for the container. The membrane may be
VESSEL INDICATING PRINCIPLE
withdrawn from the container by applying a partial
vacuum to the liquid in the apparatus. Repeat the
apparatus and procedure shall be such that these procedure for the other containers.
volumes shall be measured to within 1.0 percent NOTE 1 - Water may be used as fill liquid and in freezing
(see Note). Containers of different volumes shall temperatures,.anti-freeze fluids may be used in the calibrated
be used so that the calibration check of the volume vessel or cylinder.
indicator covers the range of anticipated test hole NOTE 2 - If the calibration container or mould is airtight,
sizes. it may be necessary to provide an air escape, since the rubber
NOTE - The lOO-mm and 150-mm moulds described in IS membrane can entrap air within the container and cause
2720 (Part 7):1980 and IS 2720 (Part 8): 1983 or other moulds erroneous volume measurement. After the volume of the
prepared to simulate actual test holes may be used. Where container has been determined with water and prior to the
several sets of apparatus are used, it may be desirable to cast insertion of the rubber-balloon, small air escape-holes may be
duplicates of actual test holes. These sets should represent the provided by placing lengths of small diameter.string over the
range of sizes and irregularities in the walls of test holes that edge of the container and down the inside wall slightly beyond
will be encountered. These fabricated holes may be used as the bottom dntre. This will permit air leakage during the filling
standards for the calibration check of the volume indicator. of the container with the membrane. If such a procedure is
This may be accomplished by forming plaster of Paris negatives necessary in the laboratory, it may be necessary to use a similar
in the test holes and using these as forms for Portland cement procedure on tightly-bounded soil in the field.
concrete castings. After removing the plaster of Paris negative NOTE 3 - Before any measurements are made, it may be
from the concrete casting, the inside surface of the fabricated necessary to distend the rubber-balloon and remove air bubbles
holes should be sealed watertight and their volume determined adhering to the inside of the membrane by kneading.
as indicated in 3.1.
NOTE 4 - In field tests the additional weights (surcharge)
3.1.1 Volumes of Containers - Determine the will increase the stress in the unsup’ported soil surrounding the
weight of water, in grams, required to fill one of test hole and will tend to cause it to deform. The stress may be
reduced by using a base plate.
the containers. Slide a glass plate carefully over
the top surface of the container in such a manner
as to ensure that the container is filled completely
4. PROCEDURE
with water. Determine the temperature of the
water in the container. A thin film of cup grease 4.1 Prepare the surface of the test hole site so that .
smeared on the top surface of the container shall itis reasonably plane. Set the apparatus on the test
make a watertight joint between the glass plate hole site and take an initial reading on the volume
and the top of the container. Calculate the volume indicator of the calibrated vessel using the same
of the container, in millilitres, by multiplying the pressure on the liquid in the vessel and the same
weight of water, in grams; used to fill the container amount of surcharge weight as was used in the
by the unit volume of water, in millilitres pergram, calibration check. After taking this initial reading
COMPENDIUM OF INDIAN STANDAKDS ON SOll, EN(;INEERING - PART 2 35

IS 2720 (Part 34) : 1972
TABLE 1 VOLUME OF WATER PER GRAM BASED ON volume indicator. The difference between this
TEMPERATURE reading and the initial reading obtained in 4.1 is
(Cluwe3.1.1) the volume of the test hole (see Note). Note the
TEMPERATURE VOLUME OF WATER temperature of the water used and correct the
*C ml/g volume for temperature, taking into consideration
12 l.ooo.48 the temperature at which the apparatus was
14 I.000 73 calibrated. After the test, pump the water and
16 1.001 03
18 1.001 38 flexible membrane back into the cylinder by
20 1.001 77 applying vacuum.
22 1.002 21 NOTE - Attentionis calledto instancesin weak soils, where
24 1.002 68 the pressure applied to the liquid in the vessel may deform the
26 1.003 20 test hole to such an extent as to give an erroneous volume. In
28 1.003 75 such instances, the apparatus shall be re-calibrated using less
30 1.004 35 surcharge weight and less pressure on the liquid in the vessel,
32 1.004 91 or it may be necessary to resort to another method such as that
34 1.005 63 given in IS 2720(Part 28) : 1974.
36 1.006 33
38 1.007 06 4.4 Determine the weight of all the moist soil
40 1.007 86 removed from the test hole to the nearest 5 g. Mix
42 1.008 57 this soil thoroughly, select a sample in accordance
44 1.009 39
with Table 2 for the determination of moisture

46 1.010 31
48 1.011 12 content and determine its weight to the nearest
50 1.012 04 O.lg. Dry the moisture content sample to a
constant weight at a temperature 100 to 110” C
and determine the dry weight to the nearest 0.1 g
on the volume indicator, scribe the outline of the [see also IS 2720 (Part 2) : 19731.
apparatus on the test hole site. Record the
pressure used, the amount of the surcharge, and TABLE 2 MINIMUM FIELD TEST HOLE VOLUMES AND
the initial volume reading. If the apparatus was MINIMUM MOISTURE CONTENT SAMPLES BASED ON
calibrated with a base plate, the base plate shall MAXIMUM SIZE OF PARTICLE
(Clauses 4.2 and 4.4)
remain in-place throughout the field test.
SL MAXIMUM TEST HOLE MOKRJRE
4.2 Remove the apparatus from the test hole site No. PAR.1ICLE SIZE VOLUME, Min CONTENT
and dig a hole centered within the outline scribed SAMPLE, Min
for the apparatus. Exercise care in digging the test (1) (2) (3) (4)
hole so that soil around the top edge of the hole is mm cm3
i) 4.75 700 &I
not disturbed. Place all the soil removed from the
ii) 10 1400 ‘300
test hole in an airtight container for weight and iii) 20 2 loo 500
moisture content determinations. The test hole iv) 40 2800 1000
shall be of the minimum volume given in Table 2. v) 63 3 800 1500
Larger holes will provide improved accuracy and
shall be used, where practicable. The dimensions
of the test holes are related to the apparatus design 5. CALCULATIONS
and the pressure used. In general, the dimensions 5.1 Calculate the moisture content, W, of the soil
shall approximate those used in the calibration as follows :
check procedure.
weight of moisture
w= x 100
4.3 After the test hole has been dug, place the weight of dry soil
apparatus over the test hole in the same position 5.2 Calculate the wet unit weight, Y,, of the soil
used for the initial reading and inflate the flexible removed from the test hole, in g/cm3, as follows :
membrane in the hole, allowing air from the hole
to escape without getting entrapped between the y = weight of moist soil
m
inner surface of the test hole and the flexible volume of test-hole
membrane (see Note 2 under 3.1.2). Apply the 5.3 Calculate the dry unit weight Yd, of the soil
same surcharge weight and pressure on the liquid removed from the test hole, in g/cm3, as follows :
in the vessel as used during the calibration check
procedure. Take and record the reading on the

IS 2720 (Part 29) : 1975
(Reaffirmed 1988)
Indian Standard
PART 29 DETERMINATION OF DRY DENSITY OF SOILS
IN-PLACE BY THE CORE-CUTTER METHOD
(First Revision)
0. FORJZWORD CBIP Publication No. 42. Standards for

testing soils, 1963. Central Board of Irriga.
0.1 With a view to establishing uniform procedure tion and Power, Delhi.
for the determination of different characteristics
of soils and also for facilitating comparative studies 1. SCOPE
of the results, the Indian Standards Institution has
1.1 This standard (Part 29) covers the method for
brought out this standard on methods of test for
the determination of the in-place density of

soils (IS 2720) which is published in parts. This
part deals with the determination of dry density of fine-grained natural or compacted soils free from
aggregates using a core-cutter.
soil in-place by using a core-cutter. The in-place
density of soil is needed for stability analysis, for 1.1.1 For the purpose of the tests described in
the determination of the degree of compaction of this standard, a soil shall be termed as fine-grained
compacted soil, etc. The core-cutter method soil if not less than 90 percent. of it passes a
covered by this part is suitable for fine-grained 4.75mm IS Sieve.
soils free from aggregations. It is less accurate than
the sand-replacement method and is not 2. APPARATUS
recommended, unless speed is essential or unless 2.1 Cylindrical Core-Cutter - of seamless steel
the soil is well compacted.Other parts relating to tube, 130 mm long (see Note i) and 10 cm internal
in-place determination of density of soils are : diameter, with a wall thickness of 3 mm, bevelled
Part 28 Determination of dry density of soils at one end, of the type illustrated in Fig. 1. The
in-place by the sand replacement method cutter shall be kept properly greased or oiled.
Part 33 Determination of the density_ in-place’ NOTE 1 - Length of Cutter - If the average density over a
by the ring and water replacement method smaller depth is required, then the appropriate length of cutter
should he used.
Part 34 Determination of density of soil
NOTE 2 - Where situations permit, for quality control
in-place by the rubber-balloon method
purposes smaller size cutters havt also been used.
0.1.1 This standard was first published in 1966.
2.2 Steel Dolley - 2.5 cm high and 10 cm internal
In this revision, the test has been made applicable
diameter with a wall thickness of 7.5 mm with a lip
to soil 90 percent of which passes the 4.75-mm IS
to enable it to be fitted on top of the core-cutter
Sieve. The dimensions and requirements of the (see Fig. 1).
core-cutter have been modified. Detailed
requirementfor the steel rammer required for the 2.3 Steel Rammer - With solid mild steel foot
test have been spelt out. 140 mm diameter and 75 mm height with a
concentrically screwed 25 mm diameter solid mild
0.2 In the formulation of this standard, due
steel staff. The overall length of the rammer
weightage has been given to international
including the foot as well as the staff should be
co-ordination among the standards and practices approximately 900 mm. The rammer (foot and
prevailing in different countries, in addition to
staff together) should weigh approximately 9 kg
relating it to the practices in the field in this
(see Fig. 1).
country. This has been met by basing the standard
on the following publications : 2.4 Balance - Accurate to 1 g.
BS 1377 : 1974 Methods of testing soils for civil 2.5 Palette Knife - A convenient size is one
engineering purposes. British Standards having a blade approximately 20 cm long and 3 cm
Institution. wide.
INDIA MINISTRYOF IRRIGATION AND POWER 2.6 Steel Rule
IS 2720 (Part 29) : 1975
long, 2.5 cm wide and 3 to 5 mm thick, with one

bevelled edge will be suitable.
2.9 Apparatus for Extracting Samples from the

Cutter - Optional.
2.10 Apparatus for Determination of Water
- 25 mm 9 SOLID Content - In accordance with IS 2720 (Part 2) :
MILD STEEL STAFF
1973.
3. PROCEDURE
MILD STEEL FOOT 3.1 The internal volume (VJ of the core-cutter in
/-
cubic centimetres shall be calculated from its
dimensions which shall be measured to the nearest
0.25.mm.
3.2 The cutter shall be weighed to the nearest
gram ( K).

l-----4O 94 3.3 A small area, approximately 30 cm square of
RAMMER the soil layer to be tested shall be exposed and
levelled. The steel dolley shall be placed on top of
the cutter and the latter shall be rammed down
vertically into the soil layer until only about 15 mm
of the dolley protrudes above the surface, care
being taken not to rock the cutter (see Note). The
cutter shall then be dug out of the surrounding
soil, care being taken to allow some soil to project
DOLLEY
from th6 lower end of the cutter. The ends of the
soil core shall then be trimmed flat to the ends of
the cutter by means of the straight edge.
NOTE - The cutting edge should be kept sharp. The cutter
should not be used in stony soils.
3.4 The cutter containing the soil core shall be

weighed to the nearest gram (W&
3.5 The soil core shall be removed from the cutter
and a representative sample shall be placed in an
\_ HARDENED air-tight container and its water content (w)
CUTTING EDGf
determined as in IS 2720 (Part 2) : 1973.
NOTE - It is necessary to make a number of repeat
determinations (at least three) and to average results, since the
dry density of the soil varies appreciably from point to point.
The number of determinations should be such that an
NOTE 1 - These designs have been found satisfactory, additional one would not alter the average significantly.
but alternative designs may be employed provided that the 4. CALCULATIONS
essential requirements are fulfilled.
4.1 The bulk density Y,; that is, the weight of the
NOTE 2 - Essential dimensions are underlined. wet soil per cubic centimetre shall be calculated
(Tolerance on all essential dimensions shall be +0.25 mm). from the following formula :
Alldimensions in millimetres y
b
where
FIG.~CORE-CUTTERAPPARATIJSFOR
SOILDENSITYDETERMINATION W,y = weight of soil and core-cutter in g,
WC = weight of core-cutter in g, and
2.7 Grafting Tool or Spade or Pick Axe V,. = volume of core-cutter in cm3.
2.8 Straight Edge - A steel strip about 30 cm 4.2 The dry density 1;. that is, the weight of the

IS 2720 (Part 29) : 1975
dry soil per cubic centimetre shall be calculated 5. REPORTING OF RESULTS

from the following formula: 5.1 The results of the test shall be recorded in a
suitable form. A recommended proforma for the
record of the results of this test is given in
y
d
= --,100yb g/cm3
Appendix A.
1oo+w
5.2 The following values shall also be reported :
where
Yb = bulk density (see 4.1), and 4 Dry density of the soil to second place of
decimal in g/cm3, and
w = water content of the soil (percent)
b) Water content of the soil (percent) to two
to two significant figures. significant figures.

APPENDIX A
(Clause 5.1)
DETERMINATION OF DRY DENSITY OF SOIL
IN-PLACE (CORE-CUTTER METHOD)
A-l. The test results shall be tabulated as follows:

Project : Tested by :
Location : Date :
12. Dry density
(Yd =

IS 2720 (Part 2s) : W74
(waffiied MS)
Indian Standard
PART 28 JIETERMINAITON OF DRY DENSITY OF SOIZ+f$,
JN-PLACE, BY THE SAND REPLACEMENT METHOD
{First Revision)
.
0. FOREWORLI Medium-.grained Soils containing not less

0.1 With a view to establishing uniform proce~ soils than 90 percent passing
dures for the determination of different a 20-tnm IS Sieve
characteristics of soils and also for facilitating (see IS %0 : 1985)
comparative studies of the results, the Indian Coarse-grained Soils containing not less
Standards Institution is bringing out this Standard than 90 percent passing
on methods of test for soils (1S 2720) which will be a 40-mrn IS Sieve

published in parts. This part deals with the (seeM 460: 1985}
determination of dry density of soi[, in-place, by 0.3 In the formulation of this standard due
the sand replacement method. The in-place weightage has been given to international
density of natural soil is needed for the co-ordination among the standards and practices
determination of bearing capttcit y of soils. for the prevailing in different countries in addition to
purpose of stability anaiysis of naturri-slopes, for relating it to the practices in the field in this
the determination of pressures on underlying country. This has been met by basing the standard
strata for calculation of settlement, etc. in on the following publications :
compacted soils the in-place density is needed to
check the amotmt of compaction that the soil has BS 1377:1961 Methods of testing soils for civil
undergone for comparison with design data. The en@neering purposes. British Standards
correct estimation of the in-place density of both Institution.
natural and compacted soils is therefore of E4DIA,MiFJEZRy OF IRFtIL3ATJONi
AND POwER,
importance, CBIP Publication No. 42. Standards for
testing soils. 1963. Central Board of
0.1.1 This standard was originality published in
Irrigation and Power, New Delhi.
1966. In this revision, the sieve size for defining
fine-grained soils has been changed to 2 mm, An SECTION 1 METHOD SUITABLE FOR FINE-
I
i) appendix has been added for the determination of AND MEDIUM- GRAJ.NEL) SOILS: SM.4LL
water content and dry density of medium- and POURING CYIXNI?ER METHOD
coar.se-grained soils containing appreciable gravel
1. SCOPE
fraction.
1.1 This method covers the determination,
0.2 This standard is divided into two sections.
in-place, of the dry density (in gicm~ or kg/m~) of
Section 1 prescribes the method suitable for
natural or compacted fine-and rnedium-grained
fine- and medium-grained soils using the small sand
soils for which a small Sand-pouring cylinder is
pouring cylinder: Section 2 lays down the method
used. The method is applicable to layers not
which uses the large sand pouring cylinder and is
exceeding 150 mm in thickness (se&Note).
suitable for fine- medium- and coarse-grained soils
containing stones which make the test of Section 1 Nn-&— With granular materials having little or no
cohesion, particularly w’len ttwy are wet, there is a danger of
difficult to perform. errors in the measurement of dry density by this rnethoii. These
0.2.1 For the purpose of tests described in this errors are caused by the slumping of the sides of t?reexcwated
standard soils shall be grouped as shown below : densitybolt- wrd afwys result in an over. esrimati[)n of the
density.
Fine-grained soils Soils containing not less
2. APPARATUS
thati 90 percent passing
a 2,0-mm 1S Sieve 2.1 SsnaIl Sand-Pouring Cylinder — similar in
(’feeIS 460: 1985) essential details to that shown in Fig. 1.
40 Compendium OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERING. PART 2

IS 272O(Part28):1974

The handle may be required for large pouring cylinder only.
Pouring Cylinder Size A B c D E F Capacity in

Litm
I
13
-I--
Small (for fine- and medium- 380 85 200 75 115 3
grained soils) kO.1
Large (for fine- medium- and 610 175 350 160 25 215 215 16.5
coarse-grained soils) fO.l
I
I
NOTE 1 - This design has been found catisfactory, but alternative designs may be employed, provided that the essential
requirements are fulfilled.
NOTE 2 - Essential dimensions are underlined.
NOTE 3 - Tolerance on essential dimensions k 1 mm.
All dimensions in milhmetres.
FIG. 1 SAND-POURING CYLINDERFORTHE DETERMINATION OF DENSITY
COMPENDIUMOFINDL4NSTANDARDSONSOILENGINEERlNG-PART2 41
IS 2720 (Part 28) : 1974
2.2 Tools for Excavating Holes - suitable tools. 2.6 Metal Containers - to collect excavated soil.
such as a scraper tool similar to that shown in A convenient size is one about 150 mm diameter
Fig. 2 to make a level surface: bent spoon, dibber and 200 mm deep with a removable cover.
shown in Fig. 3.
2.7 Cylindrical Steel Core-Cutter - of steel,
2.3 Cylindrical Calibrating Container - with an 127.4 + 0.1 mm long and 100 mm + 0.1 mm
internal diameter of 100 mm and an internal depth internal diameter with a wall thickness of 3 mm
of. 150 mm (see Note 1 under 4.2.2) of the type bevelled at one end. One suitable type is illustrated
illustrated in Fig. 4 fitted with a flange in Fig. 5. The cutter shall be kept adequately
approximately 50 mm wide and about 5 mm thick greased.
surrounding the open end. The volume of the
2.8 Metal Tray with Hole - 300 mm square and
container should be given to an accuracy of 0.25
40 mm deep with a 100 mm hole in the centre.
percent.
2.4 Balance - accurate to 1 g. 3. MATERIAL (SAND)
2.5 Plane Surface : Glass or Perspex Plate or 3.1 Clean, uniformly graded natural sand passing
Other Plane Surface - about 450 mm square and the l.OO-mm IS Sieve and retained on 600-micron
9 mm thick or larger. ISSieveshall be used. It shall be free from organic

~~-kOO- 3-' t-25-d
NOTE - This design has been found satisfactory, but alternative designs may be employed.
Alldimensions in millimetres.
F1ci.2 SCRAPER FOR LEVELLING SURFACE OF SOIL
4OlNT IN PIPE
RUBBER BUNG ONDUlt 20mm IO
150
NOTE - This design has been found satisfactory, but alternative designs may be employed.
Alldimensions in miilimetres.
FK.~ DIBBERFORDIGGING DENSITYHOLES
42 COMPENDllJM OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERING - PART 2

Is 2720 (part 28) : 1974
-IFFLAT

SURFACE
RAMMER
7
FLANGE
hORNER
ROUNDED OFF
DOLLEY
NOTE 1 -This design has been found satisfactory, but

alternative designs may be employed, provided that the
essential requirements are fulfilled.
NOTE 3 - Tolerance on essential dimensions 9.1 mm.
All dimensions in millimetres.
FIG. 4 CALIBRATING CONTAINER FOR USE

HARDENED
WITH SMALL POURING CYLINDER
CUTTING ED%
matter, and shall have been oven dried and stored
for a suitable period to allow its water content to CUTTER
reach equilibrium with atmospheric humidity (see
NOTE 1 - These designs have been’found satisfactory, but
Note).
alternative designs may be employed, provided that the
NOTE - Generally a storage1 period, after oven drying, of essential requirements are fulfilled.
about 7 days is sufficient for the water content of the sand to NOTE 2 - Essential dimensions are underlined.
reach equilibrium with the atmospheric humidity. The sand NVTE 3 - Tolerance on essential dimensions + 0.1 mm.
should not be stored in air-tight containers and should be All dimensions in millimetres
thoroughly mixed before use. If sand issalvaged from holes in
compacted soils after carrying out the test, it is advisable to FIG.5 CORE-CUTIER APPARATUS FOR Son.
sieve, dry and store this and again before it is used in further DENSITY DETERMINATION .
sand replacement tests. 4.1.1.1 The pouring cylinder sha’li be filled so
4. PROCEDURE that the level of the sand in the cylinder is within
about 10 mm of the top. Its total initial weight (WI)
4.1 Calibration of Apparatus shall be found and shall be maintained constant
4.1.1 The method given in 4.1.1.1 to 4.1.1.4 throughout the tests for which the calibration is
shall be followed for the determination of the used. A volume of sand equivalent to that of the
weight of sand in the cone of the pouring cylinder. excavated hole in the soil (or equal to that of the
COMPENDIUM OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERIIW - PART 2 13

IS 2720 (Part 28) : 1974
calibrating container) (see Note 1 under 4.2.2) laid on the prepared surface of the soil with the
shall be allowed to run out of the cylinder under hole over the portion of the soil to be tested. The
gravity. The shutter on the pouring cylinder shall hole in the soil shall then be excavated using the
then be closed and the cylinder placed on a plane hole in the tray as a pattern, to the depth of the
surface, such as a glass plate. layer to be tested up to a maximum of 150 mm (see
4.1.1.2 The shutter on the pouring cylinder Note 1). The excavated soil shall be carefully
shall be opened and sand allowed to run out. When collected, leaving no loose material in the hole and
no further movement of sand takes place in the weighed to the nearest gram (W,,,). The metal tray
cylinder, the shutter shall be closed and the shall be removed before the pouring cylinder is
cylinder removed carefully. placed in position over the excavated hole.
4.1.1.3 The sand that has filled the cone of The following alternative method shall be
the pouring cylinder (that is, the sand that is left on used for fine-grained cohesionless soils :
the plane surface) shall be collected and weighed The steel core cutter shall be pressed evenly
to the nearest gram. and carefully into the soil until its top edge is
4.1.1.4 These measurements shall be flush with the levelled surface. Soil to a depth
repeated at least three times and the mean weight of 100 mm (see Note 1) within the core cutter
(W,) taken. shall then be excavated by means of suitable
tools. The excavated soil shall be carefully col-

4.1.2 Themethoddescribedin4.1.2.1 to4.1.2.3
lected and weighed to the nearest gram (W,,,).
shall be followed for the determination of the bulk
The core cutter shall remain in position during
density of the sand (YJ.
the remainder of the testing procedure.
4.1.2.1 The internal volume ( V) in ml of the NOTE1 - If for any reason it is necessary to excavate the
calibrating container shall be determined from the holes to depths other than 150 mm, the calibrating container
weight of water contained in the container when should be replaced by one, the depth of which is the same as the
hole excavated or its effective depth should be reduced to that
filled to the brim (see Note 1 under 4.2.2 ). The
of the hole excavated.
volume may also be calculated from the measured
NOTE 2 - Care shall be taken in excavating the hole to see
internal dimensions of the container.
that the hole is not enlarged by levering the dibber against the
4.1.2.2 The pouring cylinder shall be placed side of the hole, as this will result in lower densities being
concentrically on the top of the calibrating recorded.
container after being filled to the constant weight 4.2.3 The water content (W) of the excavated
(WI) as in 4.1.1.1. The shutter on the pouring soil shall be determined by the method specified in
cylinder shall be closed during this operation. The IS 2720 (Part 2) : 1973. Alternatively the whole of
shutter shall be opened and sand allowed to run the excavated soil may be dried and weighed (W,).
out. When no further movement of sand takes
place in the cylinder, the shutter shall be closed. 4.2.4 The pouring cylinder filled to the constant
The pouring cylinder shall be removed and weight (W,) as in 4,I.l shall be so placed that the
weighed to the nearest gram. base of the cylinder covers the hole concentrically.
The shutter on the pouring cylinder shall be closed
4.1.2.3 These measurements shall be
during this operation. The shutter shall then be
repeated at least three times and the mean weight
opened and sand allowed to run out into the hole.
(W,) taken (see Note). The pouring cylinder and the surrounding area
NOTE - Since variations in atmospheric humidity affect shall not be vibrated during this period. When no
the water content of the sand, and hence its bulk density, the further movement of sand takes place the shutter
calibration should be made (or at least checked) during each
day’s work. To overcome the effects of slight variations in
shall be closed. The cylinder shall be removed and
grading and particle shape between batches of sand, each batch weighed to the nearest ‘gram (W,) (see Note).
should be sampled and calibrated. NOTE - It is necessary to make a number of repeated
determinations (at least three) and to average the results, hence
4.2 Measurement of Soil Density - The following the dry density of the soil varies appreciably from point to
method shall be followed for the measurement of point. The number of determinations should be such that an
soil density. additional one would make no significant difference to the
average.
4.2.1 A flat area, approximately 450 mm
square, of the soil to be tested shall be exposed and
trimmed down to a level surface preferably with 5. CALCULATIONS
the aid of the scraper tool.
5.1 The weight of sand (W,) in g, required to fill
4.2.2 The metai tray with a central hole shall be the calibrating, container shall be calculated from
44 COMPENDIUM OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERING -PART 2

IS 2720 (Part 28) : 1974
the following formula : 6. REPORTING OF RESULTS

w, = w, - w, - w, 6.1 The following values shall be reported :
where a) Dry density of soil in kg/m3 to the nearest
w, = weight of pouring cylinder and sand whole number. The dry density may also
before pouring into calibrating be calculated and reported in g/cm3 correct
container in g, to the second plade of decimal.
w, = mean weight of cylinder with resi- b) Water content of the soil in percent
dual sand after pouring into calibra- reported to two significant figures.
ting container and cone in g, and 6.2 The method used for obtaining the test results
w, = mean weight of sand in cone in g. shall be stated as the small pouring cylinder
5.2 The bulk density of the sand (Y,) in kg/m3 method. The use of steel core cutter, if made, shall
shall be calculated from the following formula : also be mentioned.
6.3 The results of the test shall be recorded
Y,y = 7 x 1000 suitably. A recommended proforma for the record
of the test results is given in Appendix A.
where
V = volume of calibrating container in ml.

SECTION 2 METHOD SUITABLE FOR FINE-,
5.3 The weight of sand (W,) in g, required to fill MEDIUM- AND COARSE-GRAINED SOILS :
the excavated hole shall be calculated from the LARGE POURING CYLINDER METHOD
following formula : 7. SCOPE
w, = w, - w, - w,
7.1 This method covers the determination,
where in-place, of the dry density (in g/cm3 or kg/m3) of
W, = weight of cylinder ‘and sand before natural or compacted soil containing stones which
pouring into hole in g, make the test of Section 1 difficult to perform.
W, = weight of cylinder and sand after This is an alternative method of test to Section 1
pouring into hole and cone in g, and for fine- and medium-grained soils and should be
W, = mean weight of sand in cone in g. used instead of that test for layers exceeding 150
mm but not exceeding 250 mm in thickness (see
5.4 The bulk density Yb, that is, the weight of the
Note under l.l),
wet soil per cubic metre shall be calculated from
the following formula : 8. APPARATUS
8.1 Large Sand-Pouring Cylinder - similar in the
Yb = 2 x Y, kg/m 3 essential details to that shown in Fig. 1.
where 8.2 Tools for Excavating Holes - suitable tools,
w, = weight of soil excavated in g, such as bent spoon, dibber (see Fig. 3), large screw
w, = weight of sand required to fill the driver, pointed steel rod about 300 mm long and 5
hole in g, and to 10 mm dia with a wooden handle.
Y, = bulk density of sand in kgfm3. 8.3 Cylindrical Calibrating Container - with
5.5 The dry density Yd, that is, the weight of the internal diameter of 200 mm and an internal depth
dry soil shall be calculated from the following of 250 mm (see Note 1 under 4.2.2) of the type
formula : illustrated in Fig. 6 fitted with a flange 75 mm wide
and about 5 mm thick surrounding the open end.
y
d The volume of the container should be given to an
accuracy of 0.15 percent.
or
8.4 Balance - accurate to 1 g.
Yd = $( x Y, kg/m3 8.5 Plane Surface - a glass plate or other plane
surface about 600 mm square and 10 mm thick or
where
larger.
W = water content of the soil in percent,
W, = weight of dry soil from the hole in g, 8.6 Metal Containers - to collect the excavated
and soil and to take the supply of sand to fill the
Wb = weight of sand required to fill the pouring cylinder. This may be provided with a
hole in g. suitable cover.
COMPENDILJM OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERING - PART 2 45

IS 2720 (Part 28) : 1974
r--y-35o *-y 1
/-FLAT
200 $J
SURFACE

NOTE 1 -This design has been found satisfactory, but alternative
designs
may be employed.
provided that the essential requirements are fulfilled.
NOTE 3 - Tolerance on essential dimensions f 0.1 mm.
FIG. 6 CALIBRATING CONTAINER FOR USE WITH LARGE POURING CYLINDER AND
IN THE HAND SCOOP METHOD
8.7 Metal Tray with Central Hole - a metal tray weight shall be maintained constant throughout
450 mm square and 50 mm deep with a 200 mm dia the tests for which the calibration is used (see
hole in the centre. Note). A volume of sand equivalent to that of the
9. MATERIAL (SAND) excavated hole in the soil (or equal to that of the
calibrating container) shall be allowed to run out
9.1 Clean; uniformly graded natural sand passing of the pouring cylinder under gravity. The shutter
the 1.00-mm IS Sieve and retained on the on the pouring cylinder shall then be closed and
600-micron IS Sieve shall be used. It shall be free the cylinder placed on the plane surface.
from organic matter, and shall have been oien
dried and stored for a suitable period to allow its Nom - The total weight of the pouring cylinder and sand
water content to reach equilibrium with is large, so that the method of filling and weighing is to weigh
the sand in two or three containers and tip it into the pouring
atmospheric humidity (see Note under 3.1).
cylinder before using. Care shall be taken to see that the same
10. PROCEDURE constant initial weight as is used in calibrating the apparatus is
used for each density measurement. Sufficient sand should be
10.1 Calibration of Apparatus used to leave about 4 to 5 kg of sand in the pouring cylinder
after the test is completed.
10.1.1 The method described in 10.1.1.1 to
10.1.1.4 shall be followed for the determination of 10.1.1.2 The shutter on the pouring cylinder
the weight of sand in the cone of the pouring shall be opened and sand allowed to run out. When
cylinder. no further movement of sand takes place in the
1O.l.U The pouring cylinder shall be filled cylinder the shutter shall be closed z,nd the cylinder
with a given initial weight of sand (WJ. This removed carefully.
46 COMPENDIUMOFlNDlANSTANDARDSONSOILENGINEERING-PART2
IS 2720 (Part 28) : 1974
10.1.1.3 The sand tnat has filled the cone of layer to be tested up to a maximum of 250 mm (see
the pouring cylinder shall be collected and weighed Note). The excavated soil shall be carefully
to the nearest 0.1 percent of its total weight. collected leaving no loose material in the hole, and
10.1.1.4 These measurements shall be weighed to the nearest gram (W,,,). The metal tray
repeated at least three times and mean weight shall be removed before the pouring cylinder is
(W,) taken. placed in position over the excavated hole.
NOTE - If for any reason it is necessary to excavate holes to
10.1.2 The method described in 10.1.2.1 to depths other than 250 mm the calibrating container should be
10.1.2.3 shall be followed for the determination of replaced by one, the depth of which is the same as the hole
the bulk density of the sand (Y,). excavated or its effective depth reduced to that of the hole
excavated.
10.1.2.1 The internal volume (V) in ml of the
calibrating container shall be determined by the 10.2.3 A representative sample of the
weight of water contained in the container when excavated soil shall be placed in an air-tight
filled to the brim (see Note under 10.2.2). container and its water content (w) determined by
the method specified in IS 2720 (Part 2) : 1973.
10.1.2.2 The calibrating container should
stand on a large tray during the procedure to 10.2.4 The pouring cylinder filled with the
collect the sand overflowing from the cone when constant weight of sand (WI) as in 10.1.1.1, shall
the cylinder is removed. The pouring cylinder shall be placed so that the base of the cylinder covers
the hole concentrically. The shutter on the pouring

be placed concentrically on the top of the
calibrating container and filled with the constant cylinder shall be closed during this operation. The
weight of sand (W,) as in 10.1.1.1. The shutter on shutter shall then be opened and sand allowed to
the pouring cylinder shall be closed during this run out. When no further movement of the sand
operation. The shutter shall be opened and the takes place the shutter shall be closed. The
sand allowed to run out. When no further cylinder shall be removed and the sand remaining
movement of the sand takes place in the cylinder in it weighed to the nearest 0.1 percent of its initial
the shutter shall be closed. The pouring cylinder weight (W,) (see Note under 4.2.4).
shall be removed and the sand remaining in it
11. CALCULATIONS
weighed to the nearest 0.1 percent of its initial
weight. 11.1 ‘The calculations shall be done as laid down in 5.
10.1.2.3 These measurements shall be 11.2 For medium- and coarse-grained soils
repeated at least three times, and the mean weight containing appreciable gravel fraction (plus
(W,) taken (see Note under 4.1.2.3). 4.75-mm IS Sieve) the water content and dry
density shall be determined as given in Appendix
10.2 The method given in 10.2.1 to 10.2.4 shall be
B.
followed for the measurement of soil density.
10.2.1 A flat area, approximately 60 cm*, at the 12. REPORTING OF RESULTS
place at which the soil is to be tested shall be 12.1 The results shall be reported as specified in 6
exposed and trimmed down to a level surface. except that the method used for obtaining the test
10.2.2 The metal tray with a central hole shall results shall be stated as large pouring cylinder
be laid on the prepared surface of the soil with the method.
hole over the portion of the soil to be tested. The 12.2 The results of the test shall be recorded
hole in the soil shall then be excavated using the suitably. A recommended pro forma for the record
hole in the tray as a pattern, to the depth of the of test results is given in Appendix A.

IS 2720 (Part 28) : 1974
APPENDIX A
DETERMINATION OF DRY DENSITY OF SOIL, IN-PLACE,
BY SAND REPLACEMENT
(Small Pouring Cylinder/Large Pouring Cylinder)
A-l. The test results for the two methods, namely, may be tabulated as given below using the
small pouring cylinder and large pouring cylinder appropriate symbols and words in each case :
Project : Tested by :
Location : Date :
State whether steel core-cutter was used.

Calibration

1. Mean weight of sand in cone (of pouring
cylinder) (WJ, in g
2. Volume of calibrating container (V), in ml
3. Weight of sand (+ cylinder ) before pouring

(WAin g
4. Mean weight of sand (+ cylinder) after

pouring (W,), in g
5. Weight of sand to fill calibrating container

(W, = WI - W, - W,),in g
6. Bulk density of sand Y, = ? x 1000kg/m3
Measurement of Soil Density
1. Determination No.
2. Weight of wet soil from hole (W,,,), in g
3. Weight of sand (+ cylinder) before pouring

(WJ,in g
4. Weight of sand (+ cylinder) after pouring

(W&in g
5. Weight of sand in hole (Wb = W, - W, - W2) , in g
6. Bulk density Yb = 2 x Ys kg/m3
7. Water content container No.
8. Weight of soil for water content determination,

in g
a COMPENDIUM OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERING - PART 2

IS 2720 (Part 28) : 1974
9 Weight of oven dried soil, in g
10. Water content (w), percent
11. Dry density Yd = E kg/m3
APPENDIX B
(Clause 11.2)
DETERMINATION OF WATER CONTENT AND D;RY DENSITY OF
MEDIUM- AND COARSE-GRAINED SOILS CONTAINING

APPRECIABLE GRAVEL FRACTION (PLUS 4.75mm IS SIEVE)
B-l. IN-PLACE BULK DENSITY fraction passing the 4.75-mm IS Sieve shall also be
B-l.1 The in-place bulk density (Yb) of the soil determined by oven-drying a representative
shall be determined as described in Section 2. sample.
B-3. CALCULATIONS
B-2. PROCEDURE FOR DETERMINATION OF
B-3.1 Further calculations should be carried out
VOLUME AND WATER CONTENT as follows :
B-2.1 After obtaining the wet weight (W,,,) of the a) In-place bulk
total material removed from the hole, the soil shall W%V
be separated into plus 4.75-mm fraction (gravel) density Yb
= Volume of hole
and minus 4.75 mm fraction by the 4.75mm IS b) Wet weight of minus
Sieve. This should be done rapidly to avoid loss of 4.75-mm soil = W/W8
water.
c) Volume of minus
NOTE - If this test is for construction control, the fraction
4.75-mm soii = Volume of hole - Vg
passing the 4.7%mm IS Sieve should be placed in an air-tight
container for further tests. d) Wet density of mmus
B-2.2 The fraction retained on the 4.75-mm IS 4.75-mmsoil = - (a)
Sieve (gravel) shall be washed on the sieve using a (b)
minimum of water, blotted dry with a towel to a e) Dry weight of minus
wet surface-dry condition and weighed ( Wr). (4
4.75-mm soil
B-2.3 The vulume of the gravel (V,) in a wet = 1 + W,/loO
surface-dry condition, shall then be determined by f) Dry density of minus
displacement of water from a siphon-container 4.75-mm soil (c)
from which the overflow can be measured, or by = 1 + W,/loo
weighing in air and in water. The specific gravity g) Dry weight of total material
(Gg) of the gravel p articles should then be (soil + gravel) = W’, + (d)
computed. h) Water content ( w r) of total
NOTE- For construction control, the volume of gravel
need not be measured every time a test is made. After several material, percent =. W&v-(f) )( l@-J
tests have shown that the specific gravity of the gravel from a (f)
particular source is virtually constant, the specific gravity may j) Percentage of gravel in the material
be assumed and the volume computed.
on a dry weight basis = % x 100
B-2.4 The wet gravel (wl,) shall be placed in an
oven and the oven-dry weight and water content k) Dry density of the
(w,) shall be determined. Yb
total material
B-2.5 The water content (We)in percent of the soil = 1+wr/100
COMPENDIUM OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOlL ENGINEERING - PART 2 49

Method of Load Test on Soils
SECTION 3
IS 1888 : 1982
(Reaffirmed 1988)
Indian Standard
METHOD OF LOAD TEST ON SOILS
(Second Revision)
0. FOREWORD may, therefore, be necessary to test with plates of

at least three sizes and the bearing capacity results
0.1 Visual examination of the soil exposed in extrapolated for the size of the actual foundation
suitably located trial pits at the site, combined with (minimum dimensions in the case of rectangular
the already established data for different types of footings).
soils is commonly used for deciding on the safe
bearing capacity. While this procedure may be 0.4 This standard was first published in’1962 and
adequate for light or less important structures subsequently revised in 1971. In the present
under normal conditions, relevant laboratory tests revision, the use of appafatus has been generalized
or field tests are essential in the case of unusual soil and also specific sizes of plates have been

types and for all heavy and important structures. mentioned for the different types of soils, besides
This standard covers plate load test method for
incorporating zero correction which was present in
determination of ultimate bearing capacity of soil 1971 version and prescribing log log scale for
in place which assumes that soil strata is reasonably cohesionless and partially cohesive soils.
uniform. The load test included in the standard is
also used to find modulus subgrade reaction useful
1. SCOPE
in the design of raft foundation and in the design of
pavements. 1.1 This standard lays down the method for
conducting load test for estimation of bearing
0.2 Plate load test, though useful in obtaining the capacity of soils and its settlement.
necessary information about the soil with
particular reference to design of foundation has 2. TERMINOLOGY
some limitations. The test results reflect only the 2.1 For the purpose of this standard, the
character of the soil located within a depth of less definitions given in IS 2809: 1972 and IS 6403: 1981
than twice the width of the bearing plate. Since the shall apply.
foundations are generally larger than the test
plates, the settlement and shear resistance will 3. APPARATUS
depend on the properties of a much thicker
3.1 Loading platform truss of sufficient size and
stratum. Moreover this method does not give the
properly designed members so as to estimate load
ultimate settlements particularly in case of
reaction for conducting the test shall be used. The
cohesive soils. Thus the results of the test are likely
typical set up used for gravity loading is given in
to be misleading, if the character of the soil
Fig. 1, for reaction loading in Fig. 2 and for loading
changes at shallow depths, which is not
truss in Fig. 3.
uncommon. A satisfactory load test should,
therefore, include adequate soil exploration (see 3.2 Hydraulic jack of required capacity with
IS 1892 : 1979) with due attention being paid to properly calibrated load measuring device, such as
any weaker stratum below the level of the footing. pressure gauge, electronic laod cell, or proving
ring shall be used.
0.3 Another limitations is the concerning of the 3.3 Bearing Plates - Circular or square bearing
effect of size of foundation. For clayey soils, the plates of mild steel, not less than 25 mm in
bearing capacity (from shear consideration) for a thickness and varying in size from 300 to 750 mm
larger foundation is almost the same as that for the with chequered or grooved bottom (see Fig. 4),
smaller test plate. But in dense sandy soils the provided with handles for convenient setting and
bearing capacity increases with the size of the centre marked. As an alternative, cast in-situ or
foundation. Thus tests with smaller size plate tend precast concrete blocks may be used with depths
to give conservative values in dense sandy soils. It nnt less than two-thirds the width.

IS 1888 : 1982
WOODEN JOISTS OF
SUITABLE SIZE
WOODEN PLANKS
WOODEN JOISTS
OF SUITABLE SIZE
15 cm 9 LOADING COLUMN
WITH PLUM BOB ARRANGEMENT)
E IRON STAKES
ODDEN GUIDE JOISTS

TEST PLATE
Nom - Clamp could also be at lower level.
FIG. 1 TYPICAL SET UP FOR GRAVITY LOADING PLATFORM
BAI -_ 3.._ --...._a
brRRANGEMENT
-4
,HEAD ROOM FOR
PERSON TO SIT
AND OBSERVE
DIAL GAUGE
IF NECESSARY
NOTE - Dialgaugefixturemaybe on theformclampalso.
FIG. 2 TYPICAL SET UP FOR REACTION LOADING PLATFORM
3.4 Settlement Recording Device - Dial gauges arrangement, loading columns, steel shims,
with 25 mm travel, capable of measuring wooden blocks, collar, reaction girder with cradles
settlement to an accuracy of 0.01 mm. for independent fitting to the reaction platform as
necessary to the particular set up.
3.5 Datum Beam or Rod - Beam or rod of
sufficient strength capable of maintaining 4. PROCEDURE
straightness when fitted on two independent 4.1 Selection of Location - The locations for load
supports fitted with arms or magnetic bases for test shall be based on exploratory borings, and
holding dial gauges. unless otherwise desired, shall be conducted at an
3.6 Miscellaneous Apparatus - A ball and socket elevation of the proposed foundation level under
54 COMPENDIUM OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERING - PART2

IS 1888 : 1982

TESTPIT
FIG. 3 TYPICAL SET UP FOR LOADING TRUSS
4.3 Dead Load - The dead load ot all equipment

used, such as ball and socket, steel plate, loading
column, jack, etc, shall be recorded prior to
application of load increment.
4.4 Size and Shape of Plate - Except in case of
road problems and circular footings, square plates
may be adopted. For clayey and silty soils and for
All dimensions in millimetres. loose to medium dense sandy soils with N < 15, a
FIG. 4 DETAILS OF CHEQUERS OR GROOVES 450 mm square plate or concrete blocks shall be
used. In the case of dense sandy or gravelly soils
the worst estimated conditions. In case the water (15 < N < 30) three plates of sizes 300 mm to 750
table is within the depth equal to the width of the mm shall be used depending upon practical
test plate, the test shall be conducted at water considerations of reaction loading and maximum
table level. In case water table is higher than the grain size. The side of the plate shall be at least
test level, it shall be lowered to the test level and four times the maximum size of the soil particles
maintained by pumping through a sump, away present at the test location.
from the test plate, however, for the soils like NOTE-N is the standard penetration resistance value
cohesionless silt and fine sand which cannot be determined in accordance with IS 2131 : 1981.
drained by pumping from the sump, the test level 4.5 Test Arrangement
shall also be water table level.
4.51 The loading platform shall be supported
4.2 Test Pit - The pits, usually at the foundation by suitable means at least 2.5 m from the test area
level, having in general normally of width equal to with a height of 1 m or more above the bottom of
five times the test plate or block, shall have a the pit to provide sufficient working space. No
carefully levelled and cleaned bottom at the support of loading platform should be located
foundation level; protected against disturbance or within a distance of 3.5 times size of test plate from
changes in natural formation. its centre.

IS 1888 : 1982
4.5.2 The test plate shall be placed over a fine 5. DETERMINATION OF ULTIMATE
sand layer of maximum thickness 5 mm, so that the BEARING CAPACITY/SAFE BEARING
centre of plate coincides with the centre of reaction PRESSURE/SETTLEMENT
girder/beam, with the help of a plumb and bob and
5.1 Shape of the Load/Settlement Curve - A load
horizontally levelled by a spirit level to avoid
settlement curve shall be plotted out to arithmetic
eccentric loading. The hydraulic jack should be
scale. From this load settlement curve, the ‘zero
centrally placed over the plate with the loading
correction which is given by the intersection of the
column in between the jack and reaction beam so
early straight lines or the nearly straight line part
as to transfer load to the plate. A ball $nd socket
of the curves with zero deadline shall be
arrangement shall be inserted to keep the direction
determined and subtracted from the settlement
of the load vertical throughout the test. A
readings to allow for the .perfect seating of the
minimum seating pressure of 70 g/cm’ shall be
bearing plate and other causes.
applied and removed before starting the load test.
5.1.1 Four typical curves are shown in Fig. 5.
4.5.3 The two supports of the reference beam
Curve A is typical for loose to medium
or datum rod shall be placed over firm ground,
cohesionless soil; it is straight line in the earlier
fixed with minimum two dial gauges resting at
stages but flattens out after some time, but there is
diametrically opposite ends of the plates. The dial
no clear point of failure. Curve B is for cohesive
gauges shall be so arranged that settlement is

soil, it may not be quite ruaight in the early part
measured continuously without any resetting in
and leans towards settlement axis as the settlement
between.
increases. For partially cohesive soils, curve C
4.6 Load Increments - Apply the load to soil in possessing the characteristics of both the curves A
cumulative equal increments up to 1 kg/cm’ or and B is obtained while curve D is purely for dense
one-fifth of the estimated ultimate bearing cohesionless soils.
capacity, whichever is less. The load is applied
5.2 From the corrected load settlement curves, no
without impact, fluctuation or eccentricity and in
difficulty should be experienced in arriving at the
case of hydraulic jack load is measured over the
ultimate bearing capacity in case of dense
pressure gauge, attached to the pumping unit kept
cohesionless soils or cohesive soils (see Fig. 5,
over the pit, away from the testing plate through
curves D and B) as the failure is well defined. But
extending pressure pipes.
in the case of curves A and C, where yield point is
4.7 Settlement and Observation - Settlements not well defined, settlements shall be plotted as
should be observed for each increment of load abcissa against corresponding load intensities as
after an interval of 1, 2.25, 4, 6.25, 9, 16 and 25 ordinate, both to logarithmic scales (see Fig. 6),
minutes and thereafter at hourly intervals to the which give two straight lines, the intersection of
nearest 0.02 mm. In case of clayey soils, the ‘time which shall be considered as yield value of soil.
settlement’ curve shall be plotted at each load
5.3 From Fig. 5, the safe bearing pressure for
stage and load shall be increased to the next stage
medium and dense sands could be read,
either when the curve indicates that the settlement
has exceeded 70 to 80 percent of the probable
ultimate-settlement at that stage or at the end of 24
hour period. For soils other than clayey soils, ra..ch
load increment shall be kept for not less than one
hour or up to a time when the rate of settlement
gets appreciably reduced to a value of 0.02
mm/min. The next increment of load shall then be
applied and the observations repeated. The test
shall be continued till a settlement of 25 mm under
normal circumstances or 50 mm in special cases,
such as dense gravel, gravel and sand mixture is
obtained or till failure occurs, whichever is earlier.
Alternatively, where settlement does not reach
25 mm, the test should be continued to at least two
times the estimated design pressure. If needed,
rebound observations may be taken while
releasing the load.

lS1888:1982

Settlement in mm.
FIG. 6 LOAD SETTLEMENTCURVES (LOG-LOG SCALE )
corresponding to a settlement (S,), which shall be settlement of plate.

calculated as under (S/> taken as permissible
settlement of footing (see IS 1904 : 1978) : 6. REPORT
S = s
f
p [
W$
B,(B
+ 0.3)
+ 0.3) , 1* 6.1 The continuous listing of all time, load and
settlement data, for each test shall be recorded
where with details of test elevation, natural water table,
B = the size of footing in m, profile of test pit, size of bearing plate and
B, = size of test plate in m, irregularity, if any, in routine procedure.
,Si = settlement of test plate in m, and
6.2 It is necessary to excavate soil below the test
Sf = settlement of footing in m.
plate to a depth equal to twice the dimension of the
From this formula, total settlement of footing plate so as-to examine and record the subsoil
(Sf) is calculated taking Sp as observed total profile.
OF
COMPENDIUM INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL, ENGINEERING - PART 2 57
Reaction
of Subgrade
SECTION 4
of Modulus
Determination
IS 9214 :1979
(Reaffirmed 1987)
Indian Standard
METHOD OF DETERMINATION OF
MODULUS OF SUBGRADE REACTION
(K-VALUE) OF SOILS IN FIELD
0. FOREWORD 2.3 K-value - If the assumption that the reaction

0.1 The ‘modulus of subgrade reaction test’, of the subgrade is proportional to the deflection is
usually known as K-value test, is essentially a plate entirely correct, the curve in Fig. 1 should be
bearing test. This test’ is used for the design of straight line and the slope of this line should give
pavement structures and raft foundations. the modulus of subgrade reaction measured in
MPa/cm (kgf/cm*/cm). The results, however,
0.2 Like all other soil strength tests, K-value test usually give a curve which is convex upwards and
will not provide a representative measurement of which has no straight portion even initially,
subgrade strength unless performed under the K- value is, therefore, taken as the slope of the
conditions that would be expected after line passing through the origin and the point on

equilibrium of the subgrade with the the curve corresponding to 1.25 mm settlement
environmental influences of moisture, density, (see Fig. 1) : -
frost, drainage and traffic. Equilibrium is not
attained until the structure has been superimposed K= & MPalcm (kgf/cmYcm)
upon it for some time.
where
0.3 In the formulation of this standard, due p = load intensity corresponding to
weightage has been given to international settlment of plate of 1.25 mm.
co-ordination among the standards and practices
Alternatively, the K-value may be defined as
prevailing in different countries in addition to
a pres’sure of 0.07 MPa (0.70 kgf/cm*) divided by
relating it to the practices in the field in this
the corresponding settlement. That is, when a
country.
standard 75 cm diameter steel bearing plate
1. SCOPE is subjected to a load of 3 100 kgf, say
1.1 This standard deals with the method for. the
determination of modulus of subgrade reaction of
Kc “07
TMPalcm
the soil in-place (generally known as K-value of
the subgrade) for evaluation of strength of kgf/cm*/cm ’
subgrade for roads, runway pavements and raft 1
foundations. where
d = settlement in cm.
2. TERMINOLOGY
2.4 Stiffening Plates - Nest of plates stacked on
2.0 For the purpose of this standard, the
the bearing test plate for stiffening it.
definitions given in IS 2809: 1972 and the following
shall apply. 3. APPARATUS - see Fig. 2.
2.1 Modulus of Subgrade Reaction - Ratio of 3.1 Bearing Plates - It is a circular mild steel
load per unit area (applied through a centrally plate of 75 cm diameter and 25 mm thickness.
loaded rigid body) of horizontal surface of a mass Smaller bearing plates of 45,40 or 30 cm may also
of soil to corresponding settlement of the surface. be used.
It is determined as the slope of the secant drawn
3.2 Loading Attachment - Loads are applied by
between the point corresponding to zero
means of a hydraulic jack or a screw jack working
settlement and the point of 1.25 mm settlement, of
against a reaction frame through bearing plates.
a load-settlement curve obtained from a plate load
The loading attachment should have a capacity of
test on a soil using a 75 cm diameter or smaller
at least 150 kN (15 000 kgf) equipped with ball and
loading plate with corrections for size of plate used.
socket joint between the test load and the jack to
2.2 Deflection - The amount of downward avoid eccentricity. The device should have an
vertical movement of a horizontal surface due to arrangement for attaching to a truck, trailer, truss
the application of a load to the surface. or any other equipment la&d reaction.

IS 9214 : 1979
should have an accuracy of one-half percent of the

load measured.
3.5 Loading Reaction - The reaction for jacking
can be provided by a truck, trailer or anchor frame
such that its reaction shall be at least 2.5 m away
from the centre of the bearing plates. When the
test is to be conducted on granular subgrades, a
reaction of at least 150 kN (15 OOO_ kgf) will be
required. For cohesive soils a 5 kN (5 000 kgf)
reaction may be sufficient.
3.6 Measuring Deformation - The vertical
movement resulting from applied loads will be
2.0 2.5 3.0
measured by at least three dial gauges uniformly
0 0.5 1-o 1.5
SETTLEMENT OF PLATE-mm spaced 120” apart, preferably four uniformly
placed at 90” apart, and placed at about 10 mm
K = ~kgflcm%m away from the rim of 75-cm plate. The gauges will
be supported by an independent datum bar such
FIG. 1 RESULTOF PLATE BEARING TESTON that their positions are unaffected by the loading

NATURAL SUBGRADE operations. These supports should be at least 2.4 m
3.3 Jacks - Hydraulic or screw jack of 150 kN from the plates and the wheels. The settlement
of the plate is taken as the average of the reading
(15 000 kgf) capacity.
of the dial gauges used for the purpose. Gauges
3.4 Proving Ring - One calibrated proving ring with an accuracy of 0.002 mm are desirable;
of capacity 150 kN (15 000 kgf) with dial gauge to however, gauges with an accuracy of 0.01 mm may
read to an accuracy of 0.002 mm. The proving ring be used if time-readings are made.
6000 kg min. 6000 kg min.
I
PROVING RING
BALL AND SOCKET JOINT
/JACK
STEEL CRl8BlNG
DIAL SUPPORT
h5mm max. THICK SAND \-45cm DIA PLATE

OR PLASTER OF PARIS
60cm DIA PLATE
L75cm DIA PLATE
NOTE - Support for load reaction shall be 240 cm minimum from bearing plates.
FIG. 2 SCHEMATIC DIAGRAM OF PLATE BEARING TEST .
62 OF
COMPENDIUM INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERING - PART 2
IS 9214 : 1979
3.7 Jack-Pads - Due to variation in the depth of 4.2.1.2 When the test is made on granular
test points, some distance pieces, for example, subgrade, extreme care shall be taken not to
spacers, will be required between jack and proving disturb the natural condition of the subgrade while
ring. These can be sulid cylindrical pieces of the test site is being prepared. Prior to placement
aluminium alloy or any other suitable material to of 75 cm diameter plate, the area should be cleared
withstand and help in transferring heavy loads on of loose material and levelled.
to the bearing plate. These spacers should be at 4.2.13 On gravely soils, flat bearing surface
least 15,20 and 30 cm long. The exact requirement can best be obtained with plaster of Paris, which
of these jack pads will vary from one test point to should be levelled with the plate before the plaster
another according to depth of test point below has set. The K-value test should not be started
ground surface. until the plaster has sufficiently hardened.
3.8 Stiffening Plates - These are mild steel plates 4.2.2 Preparation sf Filled-Up Area - In case
of 60,45 and 30 cm diameter and 25 mm thickness. the test is to be conducted on subgrade composed
3.9 Miscellaneous Apparatus - Datum bar of of fill materials, a test embankment of about 75 cm
5 m length with suitable dial gauge attachments, height should be constructed after necessary
pick axes, showel, trowel, spatula, spirit level and stripping. For design purposes, the conditions of
plumb bob. the moisture content and dry density of the test

area should be those which are likely to exist when
4. TEST PROCEDURE the subgrade has reached a state of relative
4.1 Two alternative test procedures may be equilibrium subsequent to the construction of
followed. More accurate tests are made with a pavement. Generally, the subgrade will be
75-cm plate, and a load reaction arrangement, a compacted at optimum moisture content and
loading jack, a proving ring to measure the load specified density. If ordinary compaction
and three dial gauges placed diagonally apart equipment is not available, approximate
about 10 mm from the rim to measure the vertical compaction may be obtained by hand tamping in
deflection. layers.
4.2 Preparation of Test Area - K-value tests 4.2.2.1. The test should be conducted keeping
should be conducted on representative area. Most in view elimination of bearing pressure of reaction
soils exhibit a marked reduction in the modulus of frame and datum bar as mentioned in 4.2.1. The
subgrade reaction with increase in moisture bearing plate with its lower surface oiled shall be
content, which cannot be generalized. Conditions placed on the prepared surface and rotated. When
of moisture content, density and type of material, the plate is removed, all proud portions indicated
all enter into the interpretation of test results to by oil marks shall be as levelled as possible. If
give a design value which will represent the levelling is difficult due to presence of granular
condition of equilibrium that ultimately will exist material, a layer of fine dry sand at no place thicker
in the subgrade. Generally, subgrade is composed than 5 mm may be laid and the plate seated
of either natural ground or fill-material. properly.
Preparation of an area for testing will depend on 4.3 Loading Procedure - There are two methods
composition of subgrade. for the determination of modulus of subgrade
4.2..1 Prepcration of Test Area for Natural reaction as given in 4.3.1 and 4.3.2.
Ground - Strip off an area equal to twice the area
4.3.1 Method I -The loading system and
of the bearing plate to the proposed elevation of bearing plate should be seated by applying a load
the subgrade surface. In any case, it is necessary to of 3.1 kN (310 kgf) (0.007 MPa for a standard 75
remove the top 25 cm of the soil before testing. cm diameter plate), when the design thickness of
The effect of surcharge can be eliminated by pavement is less than 40 cm which is normally used
having supports of datum bar at least 1.25 m away for lightly loaded pavements. For heavy duty
from the nearest edge of bearing plates. pavements, a seating loading of 6.2 kN (620 kgf)
4.2.1.1 On fine-grained soils, the bearing should be used. The seating load will be allowed to
plate, with its lower surface oiled, shall be placed remain until practically complete deformation has
and rotated. When the plate is removed, the taken place, at this time a reading should be taken
irregularities in the surface, being marked with oil on the dial gauges and adjusted to ‘zero’ reading.
shall be trimmed off. This process is repeated until Cyclic loading under 3.1 kN (310 kgf) or 6.2 kN
the plate is in contact with the soil over the u hole (620 kgf) seating load, as required, may be used to
area. assure good seating of the bearing plate. Then

IS 9214 : 1979
without releasing the seating load an additional 31 in settlement or in the case of clayey soils, when
kN (3 100 kgf) [that is, a total 34.1 kN (3 410 kgf) the rate of increase in settlement is less than 0.025
or 37.2 kN (3 720 kgf) load depending cn the type mm/min, the average of the readings of the
of the pavement] should be applied to the plates deflection dial gauges should be noted. The load,
and held until practically complete settlement has as measured by the pressure gauge attached to the
taken place. jack or by the proving ring, should,be noted, both
For recording observations, proforma given immediately before and after the deflection
in Appendix A should be used. Prior to releasing readings. The load should be increased until there
the 31 kN (3 100 kgf) load, a value of K,, will be is an additional settlement of approximately 0.25
computed for the average deflection at the plate mm and the load and deflection again noted when
rim by the formula : there is no perceptible increase in settlement. This
procedure should be repeated until a total
Ku = y ,MPa/cm , or settlement of not less than 1.75 mm has been
produced. For recording observations proforma is
kgf/cmY cm given at Appendix B.
NOTE 1 - Rapid and less accurate tests may be made with
where a 45-cm or even a 30-cm diameter plate with a 5-tonne loaded
lorry to provide the load reactions, a pressure gauge to measure
d = deflection in cm.
the ‘load and at least 3 dial gauges to measure the vertical
One of the procedures given in 4.3.1.1 and deflection of the bearing plate. In such cases, the K,, value

4.3.1.2 should be’ then followed depending upon applied should be corrected for the standard 75-cm plate as
explained in 5.
the type of subgrade and the value of uncorrected
modulus of subgrade Ku. NOTE 2 -The test may be conducted with a plate of diame-
ter smaler than 75 cm when adequate reaction is not available.
4.3.1.1 For cohesive subgrades with K, equal When a smaller plate is used, the K,value should be corrected
to 0.555 MPa/cm (5.55 kgf/cm*/cm) or less, the to get the K, value corresponding to a standard 75cm diameter
load will be released. For some clayey soils, it may plate as explained in 5.
be necessary to plot a time-settlement curve to aid
5. EVALUATION OF SUBGRADE TEST
determination of practically complete settlement.
RESULTS
In general, the load will be held until the rate of
deflection of the bearing plate is less than 0.000 5 5.1 The corrections mentioned in 5.1.1 to 5.1.4
cm/min (that is, 0.005 cm in 10 minutes). This rate should be applied before a final value of subgrade
of settlement indicates that the major portion of reaction K is evaluated.
the settlement has occurred. 5.1.1 Correction when Using Plates Smaller than
4.3.1.2 For granular subgrades or cohesive 7.5 cm Diameter - Theoretical relationship may
subgrade with Ku equal to 0.555 MPa/cm (5.55 be established between the modulus of subgrade
kgf/cm*/cm) or more, a load-deflection curve reaction and the plate diameter. This value for a
should be obtained by measuring the successive plate of particular diameter can be expressed as a
deformations caused by ‘increasing the load in percentage of the equivalent modulus of subgrade
increments of 15.5 kN (1550 kgf) to a maximum of value of a 75-cm diameter from Fig. 3 and thus
93 kN (9 300 kgf). The load should not be released equivalent value of K,, for a 75-cm diameter plate
between the increments of loading. Each can be evaluated.
increment of load shall be held for at least 15 5.1.2 Correction of Load-Deflection Curve -
minutes. The final load of 93 kN (9 300 kgf) shall
The correction should be necessary if the value of
be held until practically complete settlement is
K, is 0.555 MPa/cm (5.55 kgf/cm*/cm) or more. In
reached, but in not less than 15 minutes. In
such a case, unit loads up to 93 kN (9 300 kgf) in
general, the 0.21 MPa (2.1 kgf/cm2) load should be
15.5 kN (1 550 kgf) increments should be applied
held until the rate of settlement of the plate is less and a load-deflection curve is plotted. In these
than 0.000 2 cm/min (that is, 0.002 cm in 10 cases, the load-deflection curve shall not be a
minutes). This rate indicates that the major
straight line and hence a correction should be
portion of the settlement has taken place. made. Generally, the load-deflection curve shall
4.3.2 Method II - The plate shall first be approximate a straight line between unit loads of
seated by applying a load equivalent to a pressure 31 kN (3 100 kgf) and 93 kN (9 300 kgf) [0.07 to
of 0.007 MPa (0.07 kgf/cm*) and releasing it after 0.21 MPa (0.7 to 2.1 kgf/cm*) 1. The correction
a few seconds. A load sufficient to cause should then consist of drawing a straight line
approximately 0.85-mm settlement should be parallel to the straight-line portion of the
applied and when there is no perceptible increase load-deflection curve through the origin. The

IS 9214 :1979
deflection for computing the Kd value shall then

be determined at a unit load of 31 kN (3 100 kgf)
(0.07 MPa/0.7 kgf/cm2) and the Kd computed by
the formula given in 4.3.1. In case no straight por-
tion on the curve is observed, then at least three
points in the region having the least curvature
should be selected (see Fig. 4).
600
coo
200

0
0 50 100 150 200
DIAMETER OF BEARING PLATE-mm
FIG.~ RELATIONSHIP BETWEEN MODULUS

OF SUBGRADE REACTIONAND DIAMETER
OF BEARING PLATE
51.3 Correction for Bending of the
Plates - The bending of the bearing plate js
greater at the cenrre than at the rims, even when
nests of plates are used. A method for the
correction of modulus of subgrade for plate I I
2.11 ’ ’
bending is shown in Fig. 5.
The value of uncorrected subgrade reaction NOTE - Corrected curve may lie above or below actual
curve.
should be used as the ordinate to enter the curve in
Fig. 5. The value obtained on the abscissa in the FIG.~CORRECTIONOF LOAD-DEFLECTION
curve of Fig. 5 should be the Kb value corrected for CURVE
bending of plate.
NOTE - When uncorrected value 1s less than 0.275
MPa/cm, the correction for plate bending is negligible and may
be ignored.
5.1.4 Correction for Saturation - The moisture

content of the subgrade at the time of the plate
bearing test may increase after the pavement has
been constructed and the worst condition may be
covered by converting the value of modulus of
subgrade obtained from bearing test to a value for
the subgrade when soaked. It is impracticable to
do this directly by artificially wetting the test area.
Hence correction should be applied on the basis of
consolidation tests on the subgrade material.
5.1.4.1 The correction of subgrade saturation
shall consist of loading two samples of the
undisturbed subgrade materials in a
6 16 32
consolidometer as follows :
a) One at the in-situ moisture content, that is, Kb kg PER CUBIC cm
at natural moisture content; and FIG.~ CHART FOR CORRECTION FOR KU
b) The other at a saturated condition. FOR BENDING OF THE PLATE
COMPENDII~MOFINDIAN STANDARDSONSOILENGINEERING-PART2 65
IS 9214 : 1979
5.1.4.2 The two specimens in the where

consolidometer shall be applied the same seating KS = corrected value of subgrade for
load that was used in the field plate bearing tests saturation,
(see 4.3.1). The seating load shall be allowed to d = deformation of a specimen with
remain on the specimen having in-situ water natural moisture content under unit
content until the vertical movement becomes load of 31 kN (3 100 kgf), and
stable, at this time a ‘zero’ reading should ‘be d, = deformation of a specimen when
taken. Now apply an additional 31 kN (3 100 kgf) saturated under unit load of’31 kN
load. The total load should then be allowed to (3 100 kgf).
remain until the vertical dial gauge reading
becomes stable. If+ = 1, this correction is
5.1.4.3 The second specimen should be inaiplicable.

allowed to saturate under the seating load. After
the vertical dial gauge does not show any
movement, a ‘zero’ reading should be taken and 5.2 The corrections and order m which these
an additional 31 kN (3 100 kgf) load should now be should be apphed are explained on a flow chart
applied. Take down the readings when vertical given in Appendix C.
dial shows stable reading.
5.2.1 For easy understanding of all the

5.1.4.4 The corrections for saturation should necessary corrections required to be applied in
be applied in proportion to the deformations of determination of K-value, a sample observations
the two specimens under a unit load of 31 kN and calculations are given in Appendix D.
(3 100 kgf) in addition to the seating load as
follows :
6. REPORT
KS= + x uncorrected value of modulus 6.1 The value shall be reported corrected to the
s subgrade second decimal place.

IS 9214 : 1979 .
APPENDIX A
(ChL%?4.3.1)
PROFORMA FOR IN-PLACE K-VALUE - TEST METHOD I
Location ................................................... Tested by. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ., . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Material of test point .............. ._..................... Date.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Depth of test ..............................................
Condition of test surface : Soaked ...................
Unsoaked
Period of soaking, if any ................................
Moisture content .........................................
Density ....................................................
Method used for determination of density .........

Dia of plate used:
PROW?40 Low. DEFLECTIONDIAL AVER- CUMULA- K-value,kgf/cm%m
RINGDIAL kN GAUGEREADINGS AGE 3-m Mphll
GAUGE (kgf) DEFLEC- DEFLEC-
READINGS DGJX3DGDG TION, noN, Uncorrect- Correct- Correct- Gxrect- Correct- Corrected
12 3 4 mm mm ed Value, cd for ed for edfor ed for K-value
K” Load of Bending, Satura- Size of
Deflec- Kb tion, K, Plate,
tion, Kd ~ KP
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11) (12) (13) (14)
‘Rejected test with reason.. ..................
Result of repeat test if conducted.. ........
67
COMPENDIUM OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERING - PART 2
IS 9214 : 1979
APPENDIX B
(Clause 4.3.2)
PROFORMA FOR IN-PLACE K-VALUE (MODULUS OF SUBGRADE REACTION) -

TEST METHOD II
Location .................................................. Tested by ..............................

Material at test point ................................... Date ....................................
Depth of test ..............................................
Condition of test surface : Soaked ..................
IJnsoaked
Period of soaking, if any ...............................
Moisture content ........................................
Density ....................................................

Method used for determination of density .........
Dia of plate used :
PROVING LOAD, DEFLECTIONDIAL AVERAGE CUMULA- Ku K,IK,IK, FINAL

DIAL kN GAUGEREADINGS DEFLEC- TIVE MPakm MPakm CORRECTED
GAUGE N9 TION, DEFLEC- (kgf/cm*/ (k gflcm*/ K-VALUE
READINGS DG DG DG DG mm TION, cm) cm) MPa/cm
1 2 3 4 tim (kgf/cm*/cm)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) (11)
NOTE - Load increments to be loaded till the total deflection is 1.75 mm or more.
K-value to be computed from load/deflection plot.
Rejected test with reasons ........ ... .. ............ ... .. ....... ... ....... ..I.................................................................
Result of repeat test if conducted _.... . . . . . . . . . . . .. . ........ ....... ..... ..... ., ........ ... ............ ,.

APPENDIX C
(Clause 5.2 )
DETERMINATION OF K-VALUE ‘FLOW CHART’
4
Granular Soil Cohesive Soil

4 1
Load 0.07 MPa to 0.21 MPa K,, > 0.555 MPa/cm K, > 0.555 MPa/cm
Uncorrected Ku value = 0.07 MPa Load < UzO7MPa
Deflection (cm) Uncorrected Ku value
= 0.07 MPa
Deflection (cm)
(Not applied when

Kd <0.275 MPa/cm)
Corrected for
saturation, KS
(Interpreta-
tion)
L- I c*Correcteo
for
size plate,
Kp
Interpretation
K
K,, co.275 MPa

‘cm)
.
Corrected
for size
plate, Kp
1 =K
Load 047to 0.21 MPa
=
4
Uncorrected K,value
0.W MPa
T---J-- c Deflection (cm)
Cohesron less slits & fine sand Coarse gram&r soil
J
Corrected for load
Rarely IS the value of K, used in design For coarse granular deformation, Kd
I 1
wtthouc cunectton. In some instances the soils, the value ol Ku A saturation correction for cohesive soil in
G
correction does not fulfil the intended ,nay be used without dry region of low water table may be smaller Corrected for bending
p_uposes and is not satisfactory. Conditions correction providing ,han that determined from the consolidation of plate, Kb 1
of this instance are cohesionless or nearly, compaction require- tests. If examination of pavements in this area 1
cohesionless silts and fine sands that ‘Pump’ ments are fulfilled. indicates no loss of subgrade support at joints, Corrected ?or saturation,
and uniform, poorly graded poorly due to infilfration or leakage and the moisture - K.
content is lower than the optimum for . 1
compacted sands that tend to shift at J
pavament joints. For the conditions compaction, the value of Ku maybe accepted
Corrected for size of
enumerated above a conservative K-value for use in design without correction for
plate, Kp
saturation. I
will be assumed. =K
IS 9214 : I979
APPENDIX D
(Clause 5.2.1)
SAMPLE OBSERTVATION AND CALCULATIONS FOR
DETERMINATION OF K-VALUE
Location Tested by :
Material of test
point 0
Depth of test : OSOcm Date :
Time :
Condition ot : Partly saturated
test subgraae >
Period of
soaking, if any

}
Moisture content : 18 percent
Density : 1.8g/cm3
Dia of plate used : 75cm
PROVING LOAD DEFLECXON (mm) DIALGAUGE AVERAGE K”

RINGDIAL mkN READINGS DEFXECTION, kg/cm2/cm
GAUGEREADINGS (kgf) A mm Mea/cm
DG 1 DG 2 DG 3
10.04 3.lkN 26.00 15.10 11.26 17.45

( 310kgf)
(0.007 MPa)
10.72 34.1 kN 25.72 14.62 10.88 17.07 18.5
( 3 4lOkgf)
(0.07 MPa)
11.06 49.6 kN 25.37 14.52 11.73 16.87
(4 96Okgf)
(0.112MPa)
11.40 65.1 kN 25.00 14.00 10.36 16.45
(6 5lOkgf)
(0.150MPa)
11.74 80.6 kN
(8 06Okgf) 24.70 13.90 10.16 16.25
(0.182MPa)
12.08 94.1 kN 24.77 13.85 9.99, 16.20
(9 4lOkgf)
(0.217MPa)
0.07
Calculations K = -Tbtal dt&ion in cm = o3c 1.85 Mea/cm
at 34.1 kN (3 410 kgf)

Total deflection at
3.1 kN (310 kgf) load]
or _L!L= 18.5 kgf/cm%m.

0.038
COMPENDIUM OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERlNG - PART 2

IS 9214: 1979
CORRECTION FOR K-VALUE
SLNO MODULUSOFSUBGRADE MPa/cm (kgf/cm2/cm)
Uncorrected yalue * Corrected for load deforma- t Corrected for bending $ Corrected for saturation 75 cm 0
K, for 75 cm 0 tion curve for 75 cm @,K, of plate of 75 cm 0 Kb plate $o be done at the end)
KS L=;TX Kb
,
1 1.85 1.555 1.21 0.97

(18.5) (15.55) (12.1) (9.7)
* For applying correction to the K, value obtained in the t Correction for bending of plate of 75 cm dia shall be
field using 75 cm dia plate for load deflection, plot applied as shown in Fig. 5 (see 5.1.3). Enter at K = 1.555
load-deflection curves as explained in 5.2.2 and demonstrated MPa/cm (15.55 kg/cm2/cm), and read the corrected values for
in Fig. 4. Assuming that the curve obtained is for shear failure bending of plate, that is Kb = 1.21 MPa/cm (12.1 kgf/cm2/cm).
having concave shape upwards, draw a dotted correction curve $ Assuming; = 0.8 which is obtained from consolidation
passing through origin, parallel to the shear failure curve. Enter test result (refer 5.1.4).
at the loading intensity of 0.07 MPa (0.7 kg/cm2) and determine
Substituting value of $ in equation
corrected deflection. From Fig. 4, we obtain 0.045. Corrected
K, = i X K, = 0.8 X 1.21 (0.8 X 12.1)’ = 0.97 MPa/cm
ma(&=$
value for load deflection is Kd = = 1.555MPa/cm
( 15.55 kgf/cm2/cm). (9.7 kgfhzn’lcm)

COMPENDIUM OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERING -PART 2

Test
Penetration
5
SECTION
Standard
IS 9640 : 1980
(Reaffhned 1987)
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION FOR SPLIT
SPOON SAMPLER
(IncorporatingAmendmentNo. 1)
0. FOREWORD component parts shall be as given in Table 1.

0.1 The equipment covered in this standa-d is
used for conducting the in-situ standard 4. CONSTRUCTION
penetration test in soils covered in IS 2131: 1981. 4.1 The split spoon sampler shall be constructed
1. SCOPE as per details given in Fig. 1 to 4 and 6. The split
spoon sampler may also be provided with a liner in
1.1 This standard covers the requirements of split the body as per details given in Fig. 5 in which case
spoon sampler used for conducting in-situ standard it is called as composite sampler.
penetration test in soils.
NOTE-The composite sampler is not used for the

2. DIMENSIONS determination of N values.
2.1 Dimensions with tolerances of different 5. MARKING

component parts of this apparatus are given in Fig.
1 to 6. Except where tolerances are specifically 5.1 The following information shall be clearly and
mentioned against the dimensions, all dimensions indelibly marked on each component of the
shall be taken as nominal dimensions and equipment :
tolerance shall be as given in IS 2102 (Part 1): 1980 a) The name of the manufacturer or his
registered trade-mark or both;
3. MATERIALS b) Date of manufacture; and
3.1 The materials of construction of the different c) Type (see 4.1).
Alldimensions in miilimetres.
FIG. 1 ASSEMBLY OF SPLIT SPOON SAMPLER
TABLE 1 MATERIALSOFCONSTRUCTIONOFDIFFERENTCOMPONENTPARTSOF
THESPLITSPOONSAMPLER
(Cfuu.se3.1)
PART MATERIALS SPECIALREQUIREMENTS CONFORMING
TO
Cuttingshoe Mild steel, case-hardened Cutting edge case-hardened IS 4432:1967
(seeFig.2) to45HRC,Min
Head Mild steel, case-hardened Smooth surface IS 4432 : 1%7
(see Fig. 3)
Body Mild steel Smooth surface IS 513 : 1973
(see Fig. 4)
Liner Brass pipe Smooth surface IS 407: 1966 ’
(see Fig. 5)
Couplinp Mild steel To suit A-Type drill rods IS 1239( Part 1) : 1973
(see Fig. 6)
COMPENDIUMOFINDIANSTANDARDSONSOILENGINEERING-PART2 75
1!3!%40:1980
L_M‘1SJl3
I- 75 min.,-1

SO THREAD
FIG. 2. CUTTING SHOE '
+I
r
*25. BALL SP TWREAOS
TO SUIT ‘A’
OP couPLlwc

FIG. 3 HEAD
SECTION XX
All dimensionsin millimetres.
FIG. 4 SPLIT BODY (FOR USE WITH LINER)
508

FIG. 5 LINER

10 SUIT HEAD 5.1.1 The equipment may also be marked with
I--
I 7
the ISI Certification Mark.
NOTE - The use of the ISI Certification Mark is governed
by the provisions of the Indian Standards Institution
(Certification Marks) Act and the Rules and Regulations made
thereunder. The IS1 Mark on products covered by an Indian
Standard conveys the assurance that they have been produced
to comply with the requirements of that standard under a
well-defined system of inspection, testing and quality control
which is devised and supervised by IS1 and operated by the
producer. IS1 marked products are also continuously checked
by IS1 for conformity to that standard as a further safeguard.
Details of conditions under which a licence for the use of the IS1
All dimensions in millimetres. Certification Mark may be granted to manufacturers or
processors, may be obtained from the Indian Standards
FIG. 6 COUPLING Institution.

COMPENDItiM OF 1NDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERING - PART 2 77

IS 2131 : 1981
(Reaffirmed 1987)
Indian Standard
METHOD FOR STANDARD
PENETRATION TEST FOR SOILS
(First Rivision)
0. FOREWORD sandy and other non-cohesive soils below water

table, it is often preferable to use drilling mud
0.1 Standard penetration test conducted by means
rather than a casing. If drilling mud alone is not
of the split spoon, specified in this standard,
successful, casing may be used along with the
furnishes data about resistance of the soils to
drilling mud.
penetration which can be used to evaluate
standard strength data, such as N values (number 2.2 Split Spoon Sampler - The split spoon
of blows per 30 cm of penetration using standard sampler shall conform to IS 9640: 1980.
split spoon) of the soil. Methods of calculation of 2.3 Drive Weight Assembly
bearing capacity of soils based on N values are

covered in IS 6403 : 1981. For qbtaining 2.3.1 The drive weight assembly shall consist of
dependable and reproducable samples, a standard a driving head and a 63.5 kg weight with75 cm free
procedure is necessary and this code is intended to fall. It shall be ensured that the energy of the
furnish necessary guidance to the soil explorer in falling weight is not reduced by friction between
this regard. the drive weight and the guides or between rope
and winch drum.
0.2 This standard was first published in 1963 and
this revision has been done so as to include a 2.3.2 The rods to which the sampler is attached
standardized split spoon sampler for which a for driving should be straight, tightly coupled and
detailed specification has been formulated straight in alignment. For driving the casing, a
separately, besides including the details of the hammer heavier than 63.5 kg may be used.
correction factors which are necessary in
2.4 Lifting Bail, Tongs, Rope, Screw Jack, etc
calculation of bearing capacny.
3. PROCEDURE
1. SCOPE
3.1 Driving the Casing - Where casing is used, it
1.1 This standard specifies a standard procedure
shall not be driven below the level at which the test
for conducting the standard penetration test for
soils. is made or soil sample is taken. In the case of
cohesionless soils which cannot stand without
2. EQUIPMENT casing, the advancement of the casing pipe should
2.1 Drilling Equipment be such that it does not disturb the soil to be tested
or sampled; the casing shall preferably be
2.1.1 The equipment used shall provide a clean
advanced by slowly turning the casing rather than
borehole, 100 to 150 mm in diameter, for insertion
by driving,‘as the vibration caused by driving may
of the sampler to ensure that the perietration test is
alter the density of such deposits immediately
performed on undisturbed soil and shall permit
below the bottom of the borehole.
driving of the split spoon sampler to obtain
penetration record and the sample in accordance 3.2 Cleaning the Borehole
with the procedure specified in 3.
3.2.1 In case wash boring is adopted for
Now-The stiffness of the drill rod used for testing
influences the N value obtained by means of the test. A light cleaning the borehole, side-discharge bits are
rod ‘whips’ under the blows of the hammer. The drill rod shall permissible, but in no case shall a
preferably have a stiffness equal to A-rod (41.3 mm outer bottom-discharge bit be permitted. The process of
diameter). For depths of exploration more than 10 m, special
jotting through an open tube sampler, and then
precautions shall be taken to keep the rod vertical by using
centering spacers and/or by using stiffer rods to minimize the
testing and samplmg., when the desired depth is
whipping effect. Spacers may be provided at every 10 m or &ached shall not be permitted.
more frequently, if necessary.
3.2.2 While boring through soils such as sands
2.1.2 Casing or Drilling Mud - It shall be used that may be disturbed by the flow of water into the
when drilling in sand, soft clay or other soils in drill hole, no water shall be added to the borehole
which the sides of borehole are likely to cave in. In while boring above the water table. While boring
la COMPENDIUM OF SNDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERING - PART 2

IS 2131 : 1981
below water table, the water in the borehole shall be recorded. The first 15 cm of drive may be
be maintained at least 1.5 m above the level of the considered to be seating drive. The total blows
water table. Bentonite slurry of appropriate required for the second and third 15 cm of
consistency may be required to help the water penetration shall be termed the penetration
level to be maintained above the water table. The resistance N; if the split spoon sampler is driven
raised level of the water in the borehole should be less than 45 cm (total), then the penetration
maintained even if casing is used to stabilize the resistance shall be for the last 30 cm of penetration
borehole. (if less than 30 cm is penetrated, the logs should
state the number of blows and the depth
3.2.2.1 While boring through sand using penetrated).
casing to stabilize the sides of the borehole, the 3.3.3.1 The entire sampler may sometimes
6uter diameter of the shell shall be at least 25 mm sink under its own weight when verv soft sub-soil
smaller than the inner diameter of the’casing. The stratum is encountered. Under such conditions, it
distance between the end of the casing and the may not be necessary to give any blow to the split
bottom of the borehole should be as close as spoon sampler and SPT value should be indicated
possible and in any case not exceed 150 mm, if only as zero.
water is used to stabilize the borehole ; in case
bentonite is used, this distance may be up to 3.3.4 If, on lowering the sampler by means of a
300 trn. string of rods, it is found to rest at a level above the

bottom of the casing, the penetration test and
3.2.3 The borehole shall be cleaned up to sampling should not be carried out at that stratum.
testing or sampling elevation, using suitable tools
such as augers, that will ensure that there is 3.4 Removal of Sampler and Lahelling
minimum mixing up of the soil from the bottom of
the borehole. In cohesive soils, the borehole may 3.4.1 The sampler shall be raised to the surface
be cleaned with bailer with a flap valve. This and opened. A typical sample or samples of soil
should not be used in sands. from the opened split spoon shall be put into jars
without ramming. The jars shall have a self-sealing
3.3 Obtaining the Samples top, or shall be sealed with wax to prevent
3.3.1 Tests shall be made at every change in evaporation of the soil moisture. Jars shall be of
stratum or at intervals of not more than 1.5 m such a size that they can be filled without
whichever is less. Tests may be made at lesser deforming the sample. Typical samples shall be
intervals, if specified or considered necessary. The cut to such a size as to fill the jars and thereby
intervals be increased to 3 m if in between vane reduce the water loss to the air in the jars. If
shear test is performed. packing, as specified, is not available, liner may be
used in the sampling spoon. In such a case, the
3.3.2 The sampler shall be lowered to the
internal diameter of the sampling spoon should be
bottom of the borehole. The fgllowing information
so adjusted that the total internal diameter after
shall be noted and recorded :
incorporating the liner is 35 mm. The sample in the
a) Depth of, bottom of borehole below liner shall be waxed properly at both the ends to
ground level,
keep up the natural moisture content during
b) Penetration of ihe sampler into the soil transit.
under the combined weight of sampler and
rods (to be noted from readings of the scale 3.4.2 Labels shall be fixed to the jar or notations
over the drill rod at the top), shall be written on the covers (or both) with the
c) Water level in the borehole or casing, and following information:
d) Depth of bottom of casing below ground a) Origin of sample,
level. b) Job designation,
c) Boring number,
3.3.3 The split spoon sampler resting on the
d) Sample number,
bottom of borehole should be allowed to sink
e) Depth of sampling,
under its own weight; then the split spoon sampler
f) Penetration record,
shall be seated 15 cm with the blows of the hammer
g) Length of recovery, and
falling through 75 cm. Thereafter, the split spoon
h) Date of sampling.
sampler shall be further driven by 30 cm or 50
blows (except that driving shall cease before the 3.4.3 The jars containing samples shall be
split spoon sampler is full). The number of blows stored in suitable containers for shipment.
required to effect each 15 cm of penetration shall Samples shall not be placed in the sun.
COMPENDIUM OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERING - PART 2 : 79

IS 2131 : 1981
3.5 Field Observations 0
3.5.1 Information with regard to water table,

elevations at which the drilling water was lost or
elevations at which water under excess pressure 1
was encountered shall be recorded on the field
logs. Water levels before and after putting the
casing, where used, shall be measured. In sands, 2
the level shall be determined as the casing is pulled
and then measured at least 30 minutes after the
casing is pulled; in silts, at least 24 hours after the
casing is pulled; in clays, no accurate water level 3
determination is possible unless pervious seams
are present. However, the 24 hours level shall be
recorded for clays. When drilling mud is used and
. 4
the water level is desired, casing perforated at the
lower end shall be lowered into the borehole and
the borehole bailed down. Ground water levels

shall be determined after bailing at time intervals 5
04 14 l-8
of 30 minutes and 24 hours until all traces of
CORRECTION OF N-VALUE IN
drilling mud are removed from inside the casing. COHESIONLESS SOIL FOR OVERBURDEN
3.6 Corrections Frc;. 1 CORRECTION DUE TO

3.6.1 Due to Overburden - ‘The N value for OVERRBURDEN
cohesionless soil shall be corrected for overburden
according to Fig. 1 (N’) d) Boring number,
e) Sample number,
3.6.2 Due to Dilatuncy - The value obtained f) Type of sampler,
in 3.6.1 shall be corrected for dilatancy if the g) Drilling method,
stratum consists of fine sand and silt below water h) Sample elevation and recovery ratio,
table for values off N’ greater than 15 as under j) Limits of stratum,
(W’) : k) Water table information (see 3 5).
iv = 15 + ‘2 (N’ - 15) m) Soil identification, including condition of
samples.
4. REPORT n) Penetration records,
4.1 Data obtained in borings shall be recorded in p) Casing used, and
the field and shall include the following : q) Weather data.
a) Date of boring, 4.2 The data obtained shall be prepared in a fianl
b) Reference datum, form as a soil profile to show the nature and extent
c) Job identification, of the soil strata over the area under consideration.
COMPENDIUM
OF INDIANSTANDARDS
ON SOIL ENGINEERING
; PART2
Subsurface Sounding of soils
SECTION 6
IS 10589 : 1983
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION FOR EQUIPMENT FOR
SUBSURFACE SOUNDING OF SOILS
0. FOREWORD Except where tolerances are especially mentioned,

0.1 The equipment covered in this standard is all dimensions should be taken as nominal.
used for determination of the resistance of soil dimensions and tolerances shall be as given for
strata to dynamic penetration as covered in IS medium class in IS 2102 (Part 1) : 1980.
4968 (Part 1) : 1976 and IS 4968 (Part 2) : 1976. 3. MATERIALS
1. SCOPE 3.1 Materials for construction of various parts of
1.1 This standard covers the specification of the this equipment shall be as given in Table 1.

equipment used for determining the subsurface 4. MARKING
sounding property of soil using cone with the
4.1 The following information shall be clearly and
dynamic method.
indelibly marked on each equipment :
2. TYPES, DIMENSIONS AND CONSTRUCTION a) Name of the manufacturet or his registered
2.1 There shall be two types A and B of trade-mark or both,
equipment, the dimensions and tolerances of their b) Date of manufacture, and
parts shall be as detailed in Fig. 1 to 6 as applicable. c) Type of equipment.
M32x6
r SO THREAD
M32x6
\ SO THREAD
c- CbW*O*054
1A PLAIN CONE 1B THREADED CONE 1C ADAPTER
All dimensionsin millimetres.
FIG. 1 COME AND ADAPTER

IS 10589: 1983
TABLE1 MATERIALSFORCONSTRUCTIONOFEQUIPMENTPART
(Ch.se3.1)
SL EQUIPMENT PART MATERIAL SPECIAL RELEVANT
No. REQUIREMENT INDIANSTANDARD
OR REFERENCE
i) Threaded cone or plain cone Steel Hardened to 50-55 IS 5517: 1978

with adapter HRC and conical
surface shall be
machined smooth
ii) Driving rod, guide rod (for Type A), Steel - IS 5517: 1978
coupling and driving head
(for Type B)
NOTE 1 - For Type B, a driving rod with driving head shall be used as guide rod.
NOTE 2 - The number of driving rod and coupling shall be as required.
iii) Hammer Steel The weight shall be IS 1875 : 1978
65 kg and tensile
strength of wire
rope shall be 1400
kg/cm’ minimum
iv) Hoisting equipment :

a) Tripod legs Mild steel - IS 1239 (Part 1) : 1979or
IS 226: 1975
b) Pulley Steel - IS 1875 : 1978
c) Otherparts like winch con- Steel - IS 1875 : 1978
nectingpins, hook, axle, etc
f-- 1 500 --
M32xB M 32x8
SO THREAD SQ THREAD
2A ROD
2B COUPLING
FIG. 2 DRIVING ROD
84
IS 10589:1983
M 32x0
SO THREADT
3 A Guide Rod for Type A Equipment

f
100
L
3 6 Driving-Head for Type B Equipment
NOTE - The guide rod for Type B shall be ordinary driving rod given in Fig. 2 A fixed with this driving head
All dimensions in millimetres:
FIG. 3 GUIDE ROD
WIRE ROPE WITH FLEXIBLE

CORE Q8 WITH A’lJtLAMP
ON EITHER SIDE
WIRE ROPE WlTH
FLEXIBLE ‘CORE
DETAILS OF
HOOK
4 A For Type A Equipment 4 B For Tvpe B Equipment

FIG. 4 HAMMER

IS10589:1983
0 20 x 350 min.
PULLEYI See Fig. SC I
\\ (See Fig.SA and SB)

General Assembly of Hoisting Equipment for Type A Equipment
5 A Tripod Lag (End Piece) of Type A Equipment
5 B Tripod Leg of Type A Equipment
AI1dimensions in millimetres..
FIG. 5 DETAILS OF HOISTING EQUIPMENT TYPE A-CO&
86 COMPENDIUM OFINDIAN STANDARDSONSOILENGINEERING-PART2

I’

5 C Pulley for Type A Equipment
FIG. 5 DETAKS OF HOISTINGEQUIPMENT ME A
COMPENDIUM OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGMEERJNG - PART 2

ANGLE 35
350 LONG
@ LOOmm
TOP AN0
FLANGE ~MOxlOmm THICK

IW LEGS TO BE FIXED UP
BOX OF 2 ANGLES
Al EXlRELlE ENOG OF AXLE
S%tsi 6 mm WEtDeb
50 mm LONG @ 2Wmm clc
25 mm C CLASS
-
DETAIL AT A
ZOPCO
3 tlaEs*17mm
GRAOE PIPE
-
!
500
-12mm 7HlCK MS PLATE
WITH 2 HOLES,+17
WELOEO WITH AXLE
DETAIL AT B
‘Zoo
DETAIL AT D
6 A Details of Tripod
DETAIL AT E
1 WASHER
+65X,
6 B Details of Axle and Fixing Arrangement

for Type B Equipment
All dimensions inmillimetres.
N
FIG. 6 DETAILS 8~ HOISTING EQUIPMENTS TYPE B-Coned
6 C Details of Pulley Fixture at Tripod for 6 D Details of Winch for Type B Equipment
Type 6 Equipment
-60~1 ~12r70mm LOW0
GALVANISED
PIPE
6 E Handle for Winch for Type B Eauipment
FIG.~ DETAILS OF HOISTING EQUIPMENTS TYPE B
4.1.1 The equipment may also be marked with well-defined system of inspection, testing and quality control
the IS1 Certification Mark. which is devised and supervised by ISI and operated by the
NOTE - The use of the ISI Certification Mark is governed by ISI for conformity to that standard as a further safeguard.
by the provisions of the Indian Standards Institution Details of conditions under which a licence for the use of the IS1
(Certification Marks) Act and the Rules and Regulations made Certification Mark may be granted to manufacturers or
thereunder. The ISI Mark on products covered by an Indian processors, may be obtained from the Indian Standards
Standard conveys the assurance that they have been produced Institution.

IS 4968 (Part 1) : 1976
(R- 1987)
Indian Standard
METHOD FOR
SUBSURFACE SOUNDING FOR SOILS
PART 1 DYNAMIC METHOD USING 50 mm CONE WITHOUT
BENTONITE SLURRY
(First Rivision)
0. FOREWORD conducting the test and in the manufacture of the

0.1 The resistence, Ned (see Note) to penetration equipment. The major changes made relate to the
of the cone in terms of number of blows per 300 material of the cone and the hammer criteria for
mm of penetration may be correlated with the stopping of driving of the cone and the limitations.
bearing capacity of cohesionless soils and also Reference has also been made to the automatic
possibly with the load carrying capacity of piles, arrangement for controlling the drop of the

The correlations are qualitative rather than hammer.
quantitative in nature, and are influenced by the a.3 In the formulation of this standard, due
character of the soils, such as grain-size weightage has been given to international
distribution, surcharge pressure, permeability and co-ordination among the standards and practices
degree of saturation. The extra work required to prevailing in different countries in addition to
determine the penetration resistance is small relating it to the practice in the field in this country.
compared to the value of the data obtained, but
these data only provide a rough indication of the 1. SCOPE
consistency or relative density of the soil. 1.1 This standard covers the procedure for
NOTE-The resistance to penetration in the standard determining the resistance of different soil strata
penetration test (IS 2131 : 1981) shall be designated as N, that to dynamic penetration of a 50-mm cone and
to a 50 mm cone as NFdand that to a 62.5 mm cone using
thereby obtaining an indication regarding their
bentonite slurry as Ncbr[IS 4968 (Part 2) :19761.
relative strengths or density or both. The method
0.1.1 Correlation between cone penetration helps reconaissance survey of wide areas in a
values (Ned) and penetration values obtained by shorter time which will enable selective in-situ
other methods may be developed for a given site testing ‘or sampling for typical profile. It can
by conducting the latter tests adjacent (about 3 to provide useful data fey local conditions where
5 m) to the location of the cone test (see Note). reliable correlations have been established.
NOTE - However, for the 62.5 mm cone driven dry up to a
2. EQUIPMENT
depth of 9 m (without bentonite slurry) [see IS 4968 (Part 2) :
19761 for medium to fine sands, the following relationships 2.1 The cone driving rods, dividing head, hoisting
have been developed by the Central Building Research equipment shall conform to IS 10589 : 1983.
Institute. Roorkee. These relationships, when utilized, shall be
used withcaution. 3. PROCEDURE
N d, = lSNuptoadepthof4m
3.1 The 50 mm diameter 60” cone shall be fitted
N cbr = 1.75 N for depths of 4 to 9 m.
loosely to the driving rod through a cone adopter
where or the threaded cone shall be screwed to the
Ncbr = cone resistance obtained with a 62.5 mm driving rod. The hammer head shall be joined to
cone driven dry (number of blows for 300 the other end of the driving rod with rod coupling.
mm penetration); and
A guide rod 150 cm long shall be connected to the
N = resistance to penetration in the standard
hammer head. This assembly shall be kept verfical
penetration test (in accordance with
IS : 2131 : 1981), (number of blows for with the cone resting on the ground to be tested.
300 mm penetration). The cone shall then be driven into the soil by
allowing the 65 kg hammer to fall freelv through a
0.7 This standard was first published in 1968. In height of 750 mm each time. The number of blows
this revision, several changes have been made for every 100 mm penetration of the cone shall be
taking into consideration the experience gained in recorded. The process shall be repeated till the

IS 4968(Part 1) : 1976
cone is driven to the required depth (see Note 5. REPORT

and 4.1).
NOTE -To save the equipment from damage, driving may 5.1 The number of blows (N& as a continuous
be stopped when the number of blows exceeds 35 for 100 mm record for every 300 mm of penetration shall be
penetration. shown in a tabular statement or shown as a graph
between NCdand depth. Records of the test shall
4. LIMITATIONS
also include the following :
4.1 The maximum depth to which the cone should
be driven will depend upon the type of soil, the a) Date of probing;
position of the water table and the purpose of the b) Location;
test. If correlations of cone penetration values c) Elevation of ground surface;
obtained by other methods is desired in d) Depth of water table and its likely variation,
interpretation, in cohesionless soils the depth may from available information;
be limited to 5 m; in mixed soil with some binding e) Total resistance at the required levels;
material, the depth may be 10 m. If the test is used f) Any interruption in probing, with reasons;
for obtaining a general qualitative idea of the g) Any other information available, for
strata, the cone may be driven to any convenient example, type of soil; and
depth. h) Diameter of the cone used in the test.


IS 4968 (Part 2) : 19775
(Reaffirmed 1987)
Indian Standard
METHOD FOR
PART 2 DYNAMIC METHOD USING CONE AND
BENTONITE SLURRY
(First Rivision)
0. FOREWORD penetration values obtained by other methods may

0.1 Dynamic cone penetration test is a simple be developed for a given site by conducting the
device for probing the soil strata and it has an latter tests adjacent (about 3 to 5 m) to the location
advantage over the standard penetration test that of the cone test. However, for medium to fine

making of a bore hole is avoided. Moreover, the sands the following relationships between the
data obtained by cone test provides a continuous standard penetration value (N) obtained in
record of soil resistance. The resistance Ncb, (see accordance with IS 2131 : 1981 and the cone
Note) to penetration in terms of blows per 30 cm penetration value (Ncbr) in accordance with
of penetration of the cone specified in this standard method specified in this standard have been
and developed by the Central Building Research developed by the Central Building Research
Institute, Roorkee, has been co-related Institute, Roorkee. These relationships, when
quantitatively to the standard penetration value N utflized shall be used with caution.
obtained in accordance with IS 2131: 1981. Studies a) When the 62.5 mm cone is driven dry up to
with a view to establish a definite co-relation 9 m (without bentonite slurry):
between Ncbr and N values for different regions of NC,,,=1.5 N . . . . . . . . up to a depth of 4 m
the country are in progress. The Sectional Ncbl = 1.75 N . . . . . . . . for depths of 4 to 9 m
Committee responsible for the preparation of this
b) When the 62.5 mm cone is penetrated by
standard decided to publish this standard in the
circulating slurry :
meantime so that it could serve as a basis of test to
various investigators and others engaged in Ncbr =h’
subsurface exploration for foundations and thus 0.4 In the formulation of this standard due
make the results of investigations comparable. weightage has been given to international
NOTE -The resistance to penetration in the standard co-ordination among the standards and practices
penetration test (IS 2131 : 1981) shall be designated as N, that prevailing in different countries in addition to
to a 50 mm cone [see IS 4968 (Part 1) : 19761as Ned and that to relating it to the practice in the field in this country.
a 62.5 mm cone using bentonite slurry as NC&.
1. SCOPE
0.2 This standard was first published in 1968. In
this revision, several changes have been made 1.1 This standard (Part 2) covers the procedure of
taking into consideration the experience gained in dynamic driving of a 62.5 mm cone and thereby
conducting the test and in the manufacture of the obtaining a record of resistance of the soil. The
equipment. The major changes made relate to the cone is directly driven into the ground and for
material of the cone and the hammer, and the eliminating the friction on the driving rods,
criteria for stopping of driving of the cone. The bentonite slurry is used. The use of bentonite
diameter of the cone has been changed to 62.5 mm slurry may not be necessary when the investigation
and the provision permitting the use of cones of required is up to a depth of 6 m only.
other diameters has been withdrawn. Additional 2. EQUIPMENT
information has been given on the bentonite slurry
2.1 Cone - The cone shall be of suitable steel
used in the test: Correlations between Ncbr and N
with the tip hardened. The dimensions and the
values have also been included.
shape of the cone shall be as given in Fig. 1. The
0.3 Correlation between cone penetration values cone should be suitably threaded to enable it to be
obtained using 62.5 mm cone (Ncb,), and attached to A rods used for driving.

IS 4968 (Part 2) : 1976
driving head when the cone is driven during the

VANES test. Provision shall be made to enable the
operator to climb up the equipment for fixing the
pulley, ropes, etc. A typical set up using a tripod is
shown in Fig. 2. Suitable guides shall be provided
for keeping the driving rods vertical and in
position.
A’SIZE D(IILL ROD
2.5 Hammer - The hammer used for driving the
cone shall be of mild steel or cast iron with a base
of mild steel. It shall be 250 mm high and of
VANES IIN THE PLACE suitable diameter. The weight of the hammer
OP VANES A ORAVEL together with the chain shall be 65 kg. It shall have
TRAP MAY BE PROVIDED)
hole at the centre running throughout its length
and of suitable diameter for the A rod (see Note
under 2.2) and/or guide to pass freely through it.
The clearance between the rod and/or guide and
the hole in the hammer shall be about 5 mm.
NOTE - An automatic arrangement for controlling the

drop of the hammer may be preferred if available.
2.6 Pumping Unit for Bentonite Slurry - It

consists of slurry pump of capacity 35 to 45 l/min
at a pressure of 700 to 850 kN/m’ (7 to 8.5 kgf/cm2)
with a suction hose assembly and a swivel
assembly. For better circulation of slurry at greater
depths a vane borer consisting of four vanes and a
number of drill holes for the escape of slurry may
be provided in between the driving rod and the
cone (see Fig. 1 and Fig. 2).
3. PROCEDURE
=! 62.5 *&OS mm d
3.1 The vane shall be connected to the driving
rods, with the vane borer/gravel trap in position.
FIG. 1 CONE ASSEMBLY The driving head with the guide rod shall be fixed
on the driving rods. This assembly shall be kept in
2.2 Driving Rods - The rods used for the test position with the cone resting vertically on the
should be A rods of suitable lengths with threads ground at the point to be tested. For the circulation
for joining A rod coupling at either end. The rods of slurry the guide rod shall be connected to a
should be marked at every 100 mm. water swivel preferably through a flexible tube
Nom-The outer and internal diameter of A rods are connection and then through another flexible tube
41.27 and 28.57 mm respectively. to the pumping unit for bentonite slurry. The
swivel assembly shall be held in position by a rope
2.2.1 Four mild steel vanes as shown in Fig. 1 passing over the pulley provided for that purpose.
(see also 2.6) shall be welded to the driving. rod The slurry tank shall be filled with bentoniteslurry
immediately above the cone. As an alternative, a of suitable consistency (see Note). The slurry
gravel trap about 150 mm high of wire guage of 5 should generally be prepared separately and
mm mesh may be provided on the rod immediately stored in drums. The tank end of the inlet tube to
above the cone. the pump shall be provided with suitable
2.3 Driving Head - The driving head shall be of protection against entry of debris and it shall be
mild steel with threads at either end for A rods kept immersed in the slurry tank. The hammer, to
coupling (see Note under 2.2). It shall have a which a rope has been attached for operation,
diameter of 100 mm and a length of 100 to 150 mm. shall be slid over the guide rod, to rest on the
driving head. A typical assembly of the equipment
2.4 Hoisting Equipment - Any suitable hoisting for test using a tripod is shown in Fig. 2.
equipment, like a tripod may be used. The
NOTE - In the case of medium to fine sand, 5 percent
equipment shall be designed to be stable under bentonite slurry has been found useful. In the case of coarse .
conditions of impact of the hammer over the sand, slurry of thicker consistency subject to circulation
OF
COMPENDIUM INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERING - PART 2 93
IS 4968(Part 2) : 1976
r(N)
PULLEY FOR
HOLDING SWIVEL 1 H
WATER SW lVEL
BUILT IN LADDER

L FOOT VALVE L SILTING TANK
3 WATER LEVEL
BORE HOLE,
DRIVING ROD
VANE BORER
L CONE
FIG. 2 A TYPICAL SET UP FOR DYNAMIC CONE PENETRATION TEST
requirements may be needed. In the case of hard water, central leg of the tripod may be used for lifting the
addition of 1 percent soap solution has been found useful to get drop weight provided the free fall of the hammer is
a better suspension of the bentonite.
not affected. The driving of the cone and the
3.2 The cone shall be driven by allowing the 65 kg pumping in of the slurry shall be started
hammer to drop freely through a height of 750 mm simultaneously. Driving shall not be done for more
on the driving head. A drum type winch fixed to than 30 cm at a time after which it shall be stopped
w COMPENDIUM OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERING - PART 2

IS 4968(Part 2):1976
for a minute or two. Pumping shall, however, be 4. REPORT

continued. This helps in keeping the hole lined 4.1 The number of blows (N,,,) should be
and also avoids the choking of the holes provided
reported as a continuous record for every 300 mm
in the cone. The driving rods shall be given a few
penetration either in a tabular form or as a graph
turns (about 4 or 5 turns) every now and then so between NC,,,and depth. Records of the test shall
that the hole above the cone is maintained.
also include the following :
Efficient circulation of slurry is necessary for
eliminating friction on the rods. The number of a) Date of probing;
blows for every 100 mm penetration of the cone b) Location;
shall be recorded. The process shall be repeated c) Elevation of ground surface;
till the cone is driven to the required depth d) Depth of water table and its likely variation,
(see Note). from available information;
e) Total resistance at the required levels;
NOTE - In order to avoid damage to the equipment, driving
may be stopped when the number of blows exceeds 35 for f) Any interruptions in probing with reasons;
100 mm penetration when the cone is driven dry and 20 for g) Any other information available, for
100 mm penetration when the cone is penetrated by cicrulating example, type of soil; and
slurry. h) Diameter of the cone used in the test.


Static Cone Penetration Test
SECTION 7
IS 4968 (Part 3) : 1976
(Reaf’fhmed 1987)
Indian Standard
METHOD FOR
PART 3 STATIC CONE PENETRATION TEST
(First Rivision)
0. FOREWORD weightage has been given to internatlonal

0.1 Among the field sounding tests the static cone co-ordination among the standards and practices
test is a valuable method of recording variation in prevailing in different countries in addition to
the in-situ penetration resistance of soils; in cases relating it to the practice in the field in this country.

where the in-situ density is disturbed by boring 1. SCOPE
operations, thus making the standard penetration
test unreliable especially under water. The results 1.1 This standard (Part 3) covers the procedure
of the test are also useful in determining the for the determination of the cone resistance and
bearing capacity of the soil at various depths below friction resistance of soil at various depths below
the ground level. In addition to bearing capacity ground surface by the static cone method.
values it is also possible to determine by this test 1.1.1 This standard gives the procedure for the
the skin friction values used for the determination test only aqd certain essential details of the
of the required lengths of piles in a given situation. equipment but does not include complete design
The static cone test is most successful in soft or of the equipment.
!oose soils like silty sands, loose sands, layered
deposits of sands, silts and clays as well as in clayey 2. EQUIPMENT
deposits. 2.1 Steel Cone - The cone shall be of suitable
steel with its tip hardened. It shall have an apex
0.1.1 Experience indicates that a complete
angle of 60” + 15 niinutes and overall base
static cone penetration test up to depths of 15 to
20 m can be completed in a day with manual diameter of 35.7:& mm giving a cross-sectional
operations of the equipment, making it one of the area of 10 cm* (see Fig. 1). The cone shall be so
inexpensive and fast methods of sounding designed as to prevent the intrusion of soil particles
available for investigation; in fact, in Europe it is into the moving parts of the cone assembly.
invariably used for exploratory stage of
investigations when both time and money are at a
premium. In areas where some information
regarding the foundation strata is already
available, the use of test piles and loading tests
thereof can be avoided by conducting staticcone
penetration tests.
0.2 This standard was first published in 1971. In
this revision several changes have been made
taking into consideiation the experience gained in
conducting the test and in the manufacture of the
equipment. The essential requirements of the
friction jacket have been added; tolerances have
been indicated for the essential requirements; a FIG. 1 CONE ASSEMBLY (~YITHOUT FRICTION '
rate of travel has been specified for the engine JACKET)
d,riven equipment. Opportunity has also been
taken to give the requirements and example in SI
2.2 Friction Jacket - The friction jacket shall be
units.
of high carbon steel and of dimensions shown in
0.3 In the formulation of this standard due Fig. 2.
COMPENDIUMOFINDIANSTANDARDSONSOILENGINEERING-PART2 99
IS 4968 (Part 3) : 1976
rack and pinion arrangement operated by a winch.

The reaction for the thrust may be obtained by
suitable devices capable of taking loads greater
than the capacity of the equipment.

3 A Non-Uniform Dia 3 B Uniform Dia
FIG. 3 MANTLE TUBE
2.5.1 The hand-operated winch may be

provided with handles on both sides of the driving
frame to facilitate driving by four persons for loads
greater than 2 000 kg. The winch should be
equipped for two speeds controlled by 2 gears.
The gear should be capable of being operated in
slow and fast positions for penetration or
withdrawal of the cone-friction jacket assembly.
2.5.2 For the engine driven equipment the rate
of travel should be such that the penetration
obtained in the soil during the test is between 1 to
1.5 cm/s.
FIG. 2 FRICITON JACKET
2.6 Measuring Equipment - The sounding
apparatus should be provided with hydraulically
2.3 Sounding Rod - Steel rod of 15 mm diameter operated measuring device by which the pressure
which can be extended with additional rods of 1 m developed is indicated on the gauges. The
each in length. The sounding rod should be such cross-sectional area of the plunger of the
that the base of the cone mentioned in 2.1 could measuring head may be either 10 cm’ (same as the
be attached to it. cross-sectional area of the cone) or 20 cm2. Two
2.4 Mantle Tube - The mantle tube shall be of pressure gauges should be connected to the driving
steel and is meant for guiding the sounding rod head, one for high pressure and the other for low
which goes through the mantle tube. The mantle pressure, as follows for the plunger area of 20 cm2
tube should be in length of one metre with flush (see Note):
coupling. The diameter of the mantle tube may be a) For the 2 to 3 t equipment:
non-uniform or uniform (see Fig. 3). In the 1) 0 to 1000 kN/m2 (0 to 10 kgf/cm2) with
manually operated equipment, for ease of 25 kN/m2 (0.25 kgf/cm2) markings
operations, the non-uniform mantle tube is
or
generally used.
0 to 5 000 kN/m2 (0 to 50 kgf/cm2)
2.5 Driving Mechanism - The driving ?.
with 50 kN/m2 (0.50 kgf/cm‘) markings
mechanism should have a capacity of 2 to 3 tonnes
for the manually operated equipment and 10 and
tonnes for the mechanically operated equipment. 2) 0 to 15 000 kN/m2 (0 to 150 kgf/cm’)
The driving mechanism essentially consists of a with 150 kN/m’ (1.5 kgf/cm2) markings.
too COMPENDIUM
OF INDlANSTANDARDS
ONSOILENGINEERING
- PART2
IS 4968 (Part 3) : 1976
As an alternative, a proving ring may through the mantle tube guide and held vertically.
also be used to record the penetration The plunger of the driving mechanism shall be
resistance of the cone fitted to a hand brought down so as to rest against the protruding
operated machine. sounding rod.
b) For the 10 t equipment: 3.2.2 For obtaining the cone resistance, the
1) 0 to 10 000 kN/m2 (0 to 100 kgf/cm*) sounding rod only shall be pushed. Switching the
with 100 kN/m* (1 kg&m*) markings gear clutch to the slow position, the drive handle
and shall be operated at a steady rate of 1 cm/s
approximately (see Note) so as to advance the
2) 0 to 60 000 kN/m* (0 to 600 kgf/cm*) with
cone only to a depth which is possible with the
500 kN/m* (5 kgf/cm*) markings.
cone assembly available (see 2.7). During this
NOTE - If the plunger area is 10 cm*,the capacity of the pushing, the mean value of the resistance as
gaugesand calculationsshould be adjusted appropriately. indicated by the Bourdon gauges shall be noted
2.6.1 In both the 2 to 3 t and 10 t equipment, the ignoring erratic changes.
pressure gauges shall be so connected that the NOTE - In order to standardize the test procedure a
pressure gauge with the smaller capacity can be cut rate of 1 cm/s has been specified. Tests conducted at

slower rates (0.5 cm/s and 113 cm/s) have shown that in
off both manually and automatically when the
the case of both cohesive and non-cohesive soils the
applied pressure exceeds its capacity.
2.7 Other Requirements of the Equipment - The
equipment shall be so designed as to allow for
pushing into the ground the cone alone, and the
friction jacket fitted immediately above the cone
and the cone together, alternately, through depths
of a minimum of 35 mm each, each time. Provision
shall also be made to enable the entire assembly to
be advanced together continuously if skin friction
readings are not required to be determined
separately.
3. PROCEDURE
3.1 Basically the test procedure for determining
the static cone and frictional resistances consists of
pushing the cone alone through the soil strata to be
tested, then the cone and the friction jacket, and
finally the entire assembly in sequence and noting
the respective resistance in the first two cases. The
cone is pushed through a distance in accordance
with the design of the equipment (see 2.7) and the
need for the substrata and the cone resistance
noted. Thereafter, the cone and the friction jacket
are pushed together for a distance depending upon
the design of the cone and friction jacket assembly
and the combined value of cone and friction
resistance noted. This procedure is repeated at ANCHORS OF
\
predetermined intervals. The set up for the test is
illustrated in Fig, 4.
c
3.2 The equipment shall be securely anchored to
the ground at the test point for obtaining the FRlCflON JACKET
required reaction.
CONE ASSEMBLY
3.2.1 The rack of the driving mechanism shall
be brought to the top most position. The
cone-friction jacket assembly shall be connected
to the first sounding rod and the mantle tube. This FIG. 4 TYPICAL SETUPFOR STATIC CONE
assembly shall be positioned over the test point PENETROMETER (HAND OPERATED)
COMPENDIUMOF INDIANSTANDARDSON SOIL ENGINEERING - PART 2 101

Is 4968(Part 3) : 1976
effect of the time-rate of penetration on the cone 3.2.2) noting the mean resistance on the gauges,
resistance was not appreciable within the limits of these
ignoring erratic changes. The sequence of
rates. Tests conducted at faster rates (2 cm/s and 3
cm/s) have shown the following effects: operations is illustrated in Fig. 5.
4 For cohesive soils with cone resistance of above 1 000 3.3 The procedure given in 3.2.2 and 3.2.3 should
kN/m* (10 kgf/cm2) the effects of these rates were not be repeated after pushing the combined
significant; cone-friction jacket and mantle tube assembly to
b) For cohesive soils with cone resistance of 400 kNlm* the next depth at which the cone and friction
(4 kgf/cm*) and lower, the values decreased appreci- resistance values are required. Extension sounding
ably with increase in the rate of penetration; and rods and mantle tubes should be added after every
4 For non-cohesive soils with cone resistance varying one metre of pushing as the test proceeds.
from 1500 to 8 000 kNlm* (15 to 80 kgffcm*) , rbe cone Alternatively, the resistances may be determined
resistance increased by about 20 percent. continuously, if so desired.
3.2.3 For finding the combined cone and 3.4 After reaching the deepest point of
friction resistance of the soil the sounding rod shall investigation -the entire assembly should be
be pushed to the extent the cone has been pushed extracted out of the soil by the special operations
as in 3.2.2 at the rate of 1 cm/s (see Note under provided for in the equipment.

i Ilk- SOUNDING ROD
6 BOTTOM OP MANTLE TUBE
FRICTION JACKET
POSITION 1
POSITION 2
f- CONE ASSEMBLY
POSITION 3 POSITION 4
a = 35 mm, Min
b = 35 mm, Mir
FIG. 5 FOUR YOSITIONS OF THE SOUNDING APPARATUSWITH FRICTION JACKET
102 COMPENDIUMOF INDIAN STANDARDSON SOIL ENGINEERING- PART 2

IS 4968 (Part 3) : 1976
4. RECORDS AND CALCULATIONS Appendix A.

4.1 The results of the test shall be tabulated
suitably. A recommended proforma for this 5. LIMITATIONS OF THE TEST
purpose with an example is given in Appendix A.
5.1 The test is unsuitable for gravelly soils and for
The results should also be presented graphically in
soils with standard penetration value iV
two graphs, one showing the cone resistance in
(determined in accordance with IS 2131 : 1981)
kN/m2 (kgf/cm2) with depth in metres and the
greater than 50. Also in dense sands the anchorage
other showing friction resistance in kN/m2
becomes too cumbersome and expensive and for
(kgf/cm2) with depth in metres together with a I
such cases dynamic cone penetration tests [see IS
bore hole log.
4968 (Part 1) : 1976 and IS 4968 (Part 2) : 19761
4.2 The cone resistance shall be corrected for the may be carried out. The test is also unsuitable for
dead weight of the cone and sounding rods in use. made-up or filled-up earth since erroneous values
The combined cone and friction resistance shall be may be obtained due to the presence of loose
corrected for the dead weight of the cone, friction stones, brick bats, etc. In such places either the
jacket and sounding rods. These values shall also made-up soil shall be completely removed to
be corrected for the ratio of ram area to the base expose the virgin ‘soil layer, or readings in the
area of the cone as illustrated in the example in filled-up depth shall be ignored.

APPENDIX A
PROFORMA FOR RECORD OF RESULTS OF

STATIC CONE PENETRATION TEST
Projects: Location of test point:

Site: Ground elevation:
Bore hole reference: Ground water level.
Static cone resistance*
Correction: 1) Mass of cone, m = 1.1 kg*
2) Mass of each
sounding rod, ml = l-5 kg*
3) Cone area at
base, b = 10 cm2
4) Plunger area
(see Note)
5) Correction factor = (m+nmI) 10 kN/m’t
(to be added to m + llrnl @/cm2
the guage reading) 10
I
where
*n = the number of rods in use.
NOTE - If plunger area is 20 cm2 and base area of cone is 10 cm *, the gauge readings should be multiplied by the
ratio of the plunger area to the area of the base of the cone, that is 2.
*The figures given in the proform are by way of example only.

tl kgf has been taken to be approximately equal to 10 Newtons. The exact value is 1 kgf = 94W6 65 N.

IS4968(Part3):1976
Depth Below Gauge Reading Corrected Value of

Ground Level kN/m2 (kgf/cmz) Cone Penetration
m Resistance
kN/m2 ( kgf/cm2)
(1) (2) (3)
0.20 2 150 (22.00) 2 176 (22.26)
0.40 900( 9.00) 926( 9.26)
0.60 800( 8.00) 826( 8.26)
0.80 1 000(10.00) 1 026 (10.26)
1.00 400( 4.00) 426( 4.26)
1.20 500( 5.00) 541( 5.41)
1.40 550( 5.50) 591( 5.91)
1.60 800( 8.00) 841( 8.41)
1.80 450( 4.50) 491( 4.91)
Friction resistance measured at particular depths with the help of friction jacket attaced to the static cone*

Correction : 1) Mass of friction jacket = mf kg
2) Area of surface of
friction jacket, a = ndhcmz
where
d = outer diameter of friction jacket, and
h = length of friction jacket.
3) Cone area at base,,b = 10 cm2
1
4)I
Correction factor = looms kN/m2 mf kfg/cm2
(to be added) a I a J
= 1 kN/m2 (0.01 kgt?cm2)
Depth f Total Resis- Cone Resis- Total Frictional Corrected

Beloiv taxes,kN/m2 tance (Un- Resistance Resistance, Frictional
Ground (kgf/cm2) corrected) Minus Cone z in kN/m2 Resistance
Level kN/m2 Resistance (kgf/cm2) kN/m2
( kgf/cm2) kN/m’ W-Y) b =z ( kgf/cm2)
( kgf/cm2) a 7+ 1OOmf
a
X-Y
(<) (4) (5) (6)
2.10 1 250 (13.0) 900 (9.0) 350 (4.0) 24.5 (0.28) 25.5 (0.29)
2.20 1 300 (13.5) 900 (9.0) 400 (4.5) 28.0 (0.32) 29.0 (0.33)
2.30 1350 (14.0) 1000 (10.0) 350 (4.0) 24.5 (0.28) 25.5 (0.29)
2.40 1 350 (14.0) 1000 (10.0) 350 (4.0) 24.5 (O-28) 25.5 (0.29)
2.50 1400 (14.5) 1000 (10.5) 400 (4.0) 28.0 (0.28) 29.0 (0.29)
2-60 850 (8.5) 550 (5.5) 300 (3.0) 21.0 (0.21) 22.0 (0.22)
2.70 900 (9.0) 450 (4.5) 450 (4.5) 31.5 (0.32) 32.5 (0.33)
2.80 800 (8.0) 400 (4-O) 400 (4.0) 28.0 (0.28) 29.0 (0.29)
2.90 800 (8.0) 450 (4.5) 350 (3.5) 24.5 (0.25) 25.5 (0.26)
* The figures given in the proforma are by way of example only.

t Total resistance means resistance shown by the gauge due to penetration of cone and friction jacket
104 COMPENDIUM OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGiNEERING - PART 2

..
Vane Shear Test
SECTION 8
IS4434: 1978
(ReafIirmed 1987)
Indian Standard
CODE OF PRACTICE FOR
IN-SITU VANE SHEAR TEST FOR SOILS
(First Rivision)
0.1 The vane shear test is most appropriate for the 1.1 This standard covers the procedure of
determination of the shear strength of saturated conducting in-situ vane shear test in saturated
clays, especially of the ‘soft’ to ‘medium’ cohesive deposits for determining their inplace
consistency. The test is especially appropriate for shearing resistance. Two methods of the test,
determining the shear strength of sensitive soils namely, testing from bottom of a bore-hole and by

which are highly susceptible to sampling direct penetration from ground surface, are
disturbances. covered.
The vane shear test consists of pushing a 2. APPARATUS
four-bladed vane in the soil and rotating it till a 2.1 For Test from Bottom of Bore-Hole
cylindrical surface in the soil fails by shear. The
torque required to cause this failure is measured 2.1.1 Vane - It shall consist of four mutually
and this torque is converted to a unit shearing perpendicular blades as illustrated in Fig. 1. The
resistance of the cylindrical surface. height of the vane shall be twice the overall
diameter. It is recommended that the overall
0.2 This standard was first published in 1967. In diameter of the vane should be 37.5,50,65,75 or
this revision several changes have been made 100 mm. The design of the vane shall be such that
taking into consideration the experience gained in it causes as little remoulding and disturbance as
conducting the test. The essential requirements of possible to the soil when inserted into the ground
the torque applicator have been added. Maximum for a test. The blades shall be as thin as possible,
permissible area ratio of the vane has been related consistent with the strength requirements. The
to the vane diameter. Torque applicators of two vane should not deform under the maximum
capacities have been specified; guidance has been torque for which it is designed. The penetrating
given for the selection of the lesser capacity torque edge of the vane blades shall be sharpened having
applicator in relation to the anticipated shear an included angle of 90”. The vane blades shall be
strength of the soil to be tested and the overall welded together suitably either directly or to a
vane diameter. Opportunity has also been taken central rod, the maximum diameter of which
to give the requirements and examples in SI units. should preferably not exceed 12.5 mm. The area
0.3 In the formulation of this standard due ratio of the vane shall be kept as low as possible
weightage has been given to international and shall not exceed 18 per cent for the 37.5 mm
co-ordination among the standards and practices vane and 12 per cent for the 50,65,75 and 100 mm
prevailing in different countries in additi$ to diameter, vanes. The area ratio may be calculated
relating it to the practices in this field in this using the following formula:
country. This has been met by basing the standard 8t (D-u) + IT&
on the following publications: A,= x loo(%)
lTDZ
BS 1377 : 1975 Methods of test for soils for where

civil engineering purposes. British A, = area ratio in percent,
Standards Institution. t= thickness of vane blades in mm,
D= overall diameter of vane in mm, and
ASTM D 2573-67T Field vane shear test in d = diameter of central vane rod including
cohesive soils. American Society for any enlargement due to welding
Testing and Mateiials. in mm.
E-20 Inplace vane shear test. Earth Manual, Nom-The vane selected should be the largest size
United States Bureau of Reclamation. suitable for the general soil conditions at a site.

I!34434:1978
attachment to securely hold the string of rods

connecting the vane.
2.1.2.1 The instrument shall be capable of
applying a torque to the vane through the string of
rods and to measure the same. It should also have
a device to read the angular rotation of the upper
end of the extension rod. The torque applicator
shah be provided with speed control so that the
rate of rotation may be maintained at O.l“/s.
Friction exerted by the torque applicator should
be of negligible magnitude and shall be checked
periodically. Depending upon the estimated shear
strength of the soil, Table 1 may be used as a guide
for the selection of torque applicator of capacity 60
N.m (600 kgfcm).
TABLE 1 SELECTION OF TORQUEAPPLICATOR

ESTTMATED
SHEAR
STRENGTH (:i, :ot, (Of-i, (rt, (it, (ii) (tz,

(LgfhV)
kN/mL
18
vane size AU Au 31.5 37.5-
(dia)saitsMe 2s E sires g sires and sad
forusewith except except except except 5Omm 5Omm
6llOkgf.cm Mlmm KXhnm Mlhnm 1OOmmsires sizes
torqueapplicator and and
15mm 15mm
/
2.1.2.2 The capacity and accuracy of the
instrument shall be one of the following as may be
specified by the purchaser:
z a) Measure torque up to 60 N.m (600 kgf.cm)
to an accuracy of 1 N.m (10 kgf.cm), or
J
b) Measure torque up to 200 N.m (2 000
kgf.cm) to an accuracy of 2.5 N.m
(25 kgfcm).
2.1.3 Rod System - The string of torque rods
connecting the vane to the torque applicator called
the rod system may be of the quick coupling type
or of the threaded type. The length of the rods
shall preferably be 1 m with a few of smaller
lengths. These rods shall have sufficient diameter
such that their elastic limit is not exceeded when
FIG. 1 GEOMETRY OF FIELD VANE the vane is stressed to its capacity (see Note). The
threaded rods shall be so coupled that the
2.1.1.1 The vane rod (the rod to which the
shoulders of the male and female ends shal meet to
vane blades are f=ed) may be enclosed in a
prevent any possibility of the coupling tightening
suitably designed sleeve from just above the blades
when the torque is applied during the test. If a
and throughout the length it penetrates the soil to
vane housing is used, the torque rods shall be
exclude the soil particles and the effects of soil
equipped with well-lubricated bearings where they
adhesion. This sleeve shall commence above the pass through the housing. These bearings shall be
blades at a distance equivalent to about two
provided with seals to prevent soil from entering
diameters of the vane rod.
them. The torque rods shall be guided so as to
Nom - 7’he vanes shall be frequently checked for prevent friction from developing between the
straightness.
torque rods and the walls of casing or boring.
2.1.2 Torque Applicator - The torque NOTE - If torque vwsus rotation curve is to be determined,
applicator shall have a clamping device to rigidly it is essential that the torque rods be calibrated (priorto the use
secure it to the anchor casing and shall have an in the field). The amount of rod twist (if any) shall be
108 COMPENDIUM
OF INDIANSTANDARDS
ONSOILENGINEERING
APART2
IS4434:1!m
established in degree per metre per unit torque. This correction

becomes progressively more important as the depth of test .
increases the calibration shall be made at least to the maximum
depth of testing anticipated.
3.1.4 Dummy Rod - of dimensions equal to ONNECllON FOR
that of the vane rod of the vanes used.
2.1.5 Guides for Rod - of suitable type
provided with ball bearmg arrangement so as to
enable the rod to rotate freely (see Note).
NOTE - During the test, it is essential that the rods and
vane are placed centrally in the bore-hole. For this purpose
guides shall be used at an interval in depth of not more than 5 m.
2.1.6 Drilling Equipment - The equipment

used shall provide a clean hole of the required
diameter for insertion of the vane to ensure that
the vane test is performed on undisturbed soil.

2.1.7 Jacking Arrangement - for pushing the
shoe and vane (where required).
NOTE - The apparatus shall be checked and calibrated as
and when required.
2.2 For Tests by Direct Penetration from Ground

Surface
2.2.1 Vane - as specified in 2.1.1. In addition
the vaneshall be suitably protected by a shoe (see
Fig. 2).
2.2.2 Rod System - as specified in 2.1.3 and of
suitable type.
SECTION XX
2.2.3 Extension Pipes - about one metre in
length with coupling on the outer face to case the
hole. FIG. 2 TYPICAL VANE PROI-ECXING SHOE
2.2.4 Torque Applicator- as specified in 2.1.2.

NOTE- The apparatus shall be checked and calibrated ar plate and connect the rods to it. Tighten the torque
and when required. applicator to the frame properly. A diagrammatic,
arrangement for vane test from bottom of
3. PROCEDURE OF TESTING bore-hole is shown in Fig. 3.
3.1 Tests from Bottom of Bore-Hole 3.1.3 Allow a minimum period of five minutes
3.1.1 Sink the bore-hole up to the depth after insertion of the vane. Turn the gear handle so
required and extend the casing up to the full depth. that the vane is rotated at the rate of O*l’“/s.Note
If the casing is loose, secure it so that it does not the maximum torque reading attained. If
move during the tests. Fix the torque applicator necessary, note the torque indicator dial gauge
anchor plate to the casing. readings at half-minute intervals and continue
rotating the vane until the reading drops
3.1.2 Connect the vane of suitable size (see appreciably from the maximum.
2.1.1, Note) to the rods and lower it to the bottom
of the bore-hole, putting guides at suitable 3.1.4 Just after the determination of the
intervals but not more than about 5 m as the rods maximum torque, rotate the vane rapidly through
are extended. Push the vane with a moderate a minimum of ten revolutions. The remoulded
steady force up to a depth of five times the strength should then be determined (see 3.1.3)
diameter of the bore-hole below the bottom of the within one minute after completion of the
bore-hole or shoe. Take precautions to make sure revolutions.
that no torque is applied to the torque rods during 3.1.5 Remove the vane testing assembly,
the thrust. No hammering shall be permitted. Fix continue boring, and collect soil sample from the
the torque applicator with frame to the anchor level of the vane testing for laboratory analysis to
COMPENDIUM OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENClNEERING - PART 2 109

TORQUE MEASURING protecting shoe and jack or drive it to the required
INSTRUMENT
depth. Care shall be taken to see that the rods
remain tight while the vane is lowered. Place
guides about every 3 m to .centralize and reduce
friction between the rods and extension pipes.
GROLINO LEVEL
3.2.2 When the vane and protecting shoe have
penetrated to the required depth, push the vane
steadily, without twisting, a distance of 5 times the
diameter of the shoe, into the undisturbed soil
below the protecting shoe. Rotate the vane till the
soil fails as in 3.1. A diagram.matic vane test
arrangement for testing by direct penetration from
INTERMEDIATE GUIDES ground surface is given in Fig. 4.
AT Sm INTERVALS
TORQUE MEASU
INSTRUMENT

/-
Jfhl SORE
CASING
MOLE
GROUND LEVEL
PENEliAllON ’
AS REQUIRED E ’ /-VANE ROD SLEEVE
IS II DIA Of BORE ?
HOLE, min.) ( TORQUE ROD
YANE
F1c.3 DIAGRAMMATIC VANE TEST

ARR4NGEMENT(FOR TEST FROM
BOTTOM OF BORE-HOLE) EXTENSION PIPE
ascertain whether the deposit will behave as a

purely cohesive soil.
3.1.6 In case where a sleeve is not provided for
the vane rod and the soil is in contact with the rod,
determine the friction between the soil and the
vane roct by conducting tests at appropriate depths
using the dummy rod corresponding to that of the
vane used in the test. The test should be conducted
as with the vane except that the vane is replaced by
dummy rod. The test should be conducted in an
adjacent bore-hole at the same depth at which the
vane tests were conducted. The dummy rod should
be pushed into thi: ground to the same distance as
the vane rod at that depth.
3.2 Test by Direct Penetration from Ground
Surface FIG.~ DIAGRAMMATIC VANE TEST
ARRANGEMENT(TEST BY DIRECT
3.2.1 Lock the vane in-place inside the PENETRATION FROMGROUND SURFACE)
110 COMPENDIUM OF INDIAN STANDARD!3 ON SOIL ENGINEERING - PART 2

IS4434:lWS
3.2.3 Remove the torque measuring instrument strength or the soil usmg the following rormula
and pull back the vane fully into its protecting shoe (see Note 1):
before advancing for another test or before being
removed from the ground taking precautions that
the vane is not damaged by the shoe.
3.2.4 In the case where soil is in contact with the where

torque rods, determine the friction between the S shear strength in kN/ni* (kgf.cm*);
soil and the rod by means of torque tests conducted MI torque, to shear the soil in N.m
on similar rods at similar depths with no vane (kgf.cm) (corrected for vane rod and
attached. Conduct the rod friction test at least torque rod resistance, if any);
once on each site; this shall consist of a series of
D= overall diameter of vane in mm (see
torque tests at varying depths. A dummy should
Note 2); and
be used instead of the vane if the vane rod is not
H= height of vane in mm (see Note 2).
provided with a sleeve.
NOTE 1 - This formula is based on the assumptions that (a)
Shearing strength in the horizontal and vertical directions are
4. RECORDS the same. (b) At the peak value, shear strength is equally
mobilized at the end surface as well as at the centre and that

both the top and the bottom ends of the vane take part in
4.1 Records of vane shear test shall be maintained
shearing the soil. (c) It is assumed that the shear surface is
in a suitable form including details given in cylindrical and has a diameter equal to the diameter of the vane.
Appendix A, which gives a recommended
proforma for the record of results. NOTE 2 - It is important that the dimensions of the vane
are checked periodically to ensure that the vane is not distorted
or worn. Actual values should be used in the calculation.
5. COMPUTATIONS 5.2.1 If H = 2 D, then the formula given in 5.2
reduces to
5.1 For vane testing instruments that do not read
the torque directly a calibration curve to convert +2!K_ x lo6 (S in kN/m*)
the readings to newton metre (kilogram force 1103
centimetre) of torque shall be provided. These
calibration curves shall be checked periodically. SE 3M x lo3 (S in kgf/m2) (see Notes 1
1103
5.2 For a rectangular vane, calculate the shear and 2 of 5.2)

IS 4434 : 1978
APPENDIX A ..
(Clause 4.1)
PROFORMA FOR FIELD VANE SHEAR TEST
GENERAL
Project: Drilling or testing foreman:
Bore-hole No. : Supervising engineer:
(if any)
Date of test:
DETAILS OF BORING (IF ANY)
Location: Log of soil conditions:
Reference elevation:
or
Ground elevation:
Method of making the hole:
Casedluncased:

Level of water in the bore-hole/
level of ground water at the
time of test:
Notes on driving resistance:
DETAILS OF VANE TEST
Test from bottom of bore-hole: Test by direct penetration from
ground surface:
Vane test apparatus No.:
Vane Size: Vane constant:
Diameter of dummy rod
(if used):
Conversion factor for torque
measuring equipment:
Depth
torque measuring
Shear strength of
undisturbed soil,
kN/m’(kgfhd)
Shear strength of
remoulded soil,
kN/m’ (kgfIcm*)
Sensitivity
D = test with dumm) if used or any other test for the determination of friction of vane rod and/or torque rods.
U = test with vane in undisturbed soil.
R = test Gth vane in remoulded soil.
Record of deviation from standard procedure, if any, with reasons.
112 COMPENDIUM
OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERING - PART 2
Is4434:lWB
Time - Rotation Readings
TIME IN MINUTES

8’12
9’12
10
D = test with dummy if used or any other test for the determination of friction of vane rod and/or torque rods.
U = test with vane in undisturbed soil.
R = test with vane in remoulded soil.
Record of deviations from standard procedure, if any, with reasons.
COMPENDIIlM OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERING - PART 2

Direct Shear Test
SECTION 9
IS loo42 : 1981
(Reaffirmed 1987)
Indian Standard
SITE INVESTIGATIONS FOR FOUNDATION IN
GRAVEL-BOULDER DEPOSIT
0. FOREW.ORD
2.2 Concrete-Boulder Test (CBT) - A cast in-situ
0.1 The advent of the large river valley projects in concrete block on boulder soil and pushing the
India necessitated the erection of heavy indusrrial block laterally under a normal load.
comptexes in river or old river courses. It will,
therefore, be necessary to determine foundation 2.3 Depth on Foundation -The minimum vertical
conditions in respect of the following before a distance between the soil surface and base on the
design can be finalized: foundation.

2.4 Dynamic Cone Penetration Test (DCPT) - A
a) Sequence and extent of overburden soil un-
subsurface sounding used to ascertain the soil
delain by boulder-gravel soil deposit, to be
strata.
affected by the proposed work;
b) Nature of matrix of boulders; 2.5 Residual Shear Strength - Minimum shear
c) The amount and state of packing of the strength exhibited by the soil.
boulders, their nature (rounded or other-
3. SYMBOLS
wise) and the size of the boulders present;
d) Whether the boulder-gravel is laying in the 3.1 For the purpose of this standard and unless
matrix of material or otherwise; defined in the text, the following letter symbols
e) Nature of each stratum if there is any shall have the meaning indicated against each :
change, ground water table and its possible Bf = width of the strip foundation, side of
effects on foundation material; and
square foundation, diameter of circular
f) General information on geology and sur-
foundation expressed in metres,
face drainage, etc.
9, = allowable soil pressure corresponding to
This standard has, therefore, been formulated 12 mm or 25 mm settlement in tonnes/m*,
to cover these aspects, as methods adopted for
7, = residual soil strength in t/m*,
soils (see IS 1892 : 1979) will not be applicable in
such cases. s, = allowable settlement for a structure in
cm,
0.2 In the formulation of this standard,
N” = cummulative number of blows
considerable assistance has been given by Central
Building Research Institute, Roorkee. corresponding to a depth D, in m,
D, = depth of penetration in cm,
1. SCOPE
B, = diameter of cone in cm, and. ’
1.1 This code deals with the subsurface
Yc = natural unit weight of the soils in t/m*.
investigation in relation to design of foundations
for single and multistoreyed buildings, overhead 4. GENERAL
water tanks, piers and abutments of bridges in 4.1 The type of material found iri such.locations as
boulder-gravel deposits. river beds or old river courses falls neither in the
class of soils nor rocks but in the form of gravel-
2. TERMINOLOGY boulders.
2.0 For the purpose of this standard, the following
The average size of the boulder is larger than
definitions in addition to those given in IS 2809 :
300 mm and it is generally mixed with fine (4.75 -
1972 shall apply.
20 mm) to coarse ( 20 - 80 mm) gravels. Soils with
2.1 Boulder-Boulder Test (BBT) - A block cut a large quantity of gravel-boulders deposit pose
out of the boulder soil is sheared under a normal several problems in investigation. The presence of
load. large sized particles precludes the sampling by the

IS loo42 : 19Rl
usual methods of soil sampling in the true sense. exists a filler material, there is an initial
Tests on disturbed samples are likely to yield compression stage followed by low compression
unreliable results, as the natural arrangements of stage when the load carrying capacity is high. If the
the grains and matrix material are never achieved gravel lies in the matrix of the filler material, the
by recompaction. The best results are obtained by behaviour is governed by the nature of the filler
properly chosen field tests. material and it is likely ro reduce the
compressibility. The boulder soil unlike ordinary
4.2 Nature of the Deposit - ‘The deposits soil shows certain peculiar characteristics when the
commonly called boulder deposits may be of boulder proportion is large (> 30 percent); the
fluvial or glacial origin. Generally, there exists deposit shows an initial rapid compression
some filler material which may be sand, silt or clay followed by a stage where the compression
mixed with fine to coarse gravels. decreases considerably,as the boulders take over
4.3 Behaviour Under Load -The performance of the load carrying function (see Fig. 2). In such
such deposits under load, a matter of intelligent cases, it is of advantage to have the allowable load
guess, is generally made on conservative side well in excess of the load at which initial
leading to high cost of foundations. The behaviour compression occurs, thereby reducing
of boulder deposits under high loads also depends deformations at design loads.
upon the size and quantity of gravel-boulder and

However, in the other situations when the
also the nature and amount of the filler material. If boulder-gravel quantity is small (< 30 percent),
the filler material exists only in the interstices of normal methods of interpretation (IS 1888 : 1982)
the boulder (see Fig. lA), the behaviour depend: will be used (see Fig. 3, curves A, E and G).
upon the state of packing of the boulders, nature
(rounded or otherwise) and the size of the boulder; 4.4 Influence of Filler Material - if the
on the other hand if the boulder exists in the matrix cobbles/boulders exist in the matrix of the filler
of the filler material (see Fig. lB), the behaviour material, .properties of the matrix govern the
will be governed by the size, quantity and overall behaviour, though the presence of
distribution of the boulder in the filler. When the gravel/boulder shall reduce the compressibility of
filler material is absent, the load carrying capacity
is high and the compressibility is low. When there
1A Filler Material Existing in the

Interstices of Boulder/Gravel
G.L.
0 5 10 15 20 25 30
DEFORMATION, mm
Natural
density
= 2,21gm!cc
Grain>5cm = 57%
.Muxgrainsize
= 3SOmm
1 B Boulder Gravel EXising in the Matrix
Grain> 12mm = 32%
of the Interstitial Material
FIG.:!LOAD SETTLEMENTGCJR~ES MAERIAI
FIG.~ GRAVEL-B• ULDERSOILSTRATUM IJFSINTME MATRIXOFBOULDERS
118 COMPENDIUMOFINDIAN STANDARDS ON SOII.ElilGINEERING-PART2

IS loo42 : 1981
the matrix material to some extent (see Fig. 3 and collected at about 1 m depth or change of strata for
4). However, if this material exisis onl; in the identification and grain size analysis.
interstices of the boulders, the boulders being in Non - These samples shall also be used to determine the
contact (see Fig. lA), the behaviour is essentially moisture content of the material and the overall proportion of
governed by the boulder. material in the boulder soil strata.
5.3 In-Situ Density - The measurement of

shall be made by water
1
12 natural density
I I I I I I I replacement method/sand replacement method.
For this purpose, a pit of known dimensions is
excavated (1 m x 1 m x 50 cm).
I I I I II I I

-0 10 20 30 LO 50 60 70 60
OEFORMAlION,mm
r-
TEST INTERSTITIALMATERIAL REUARKS
No. < 0.25mm’
B 27 Allfooting
6Ocm
H 52 Square
A 68
21 Reasonnot
: 100 known
FIG. 3 LOAD SETT‘LEMENT CURVES

(BOULDER LIES IN THE MATRIX OF
MATERIAL)
5. METHODS OF INVESTIGATIONS
5.1 Field Test -The method of exploding by open
trial pits consists in excavating trial pits at the site
and thereby exposing the sub-soil strata
thoroughly, enabling identification and OEFORMATION mm
classification of the soil. The pit size shall be
sufficiently large (5 x 5 m) but not less than 2 x 2 TESS INTERSTITIALMATERIAL REMARKS
m. The depth of excavation is 4 to 6 m. The sides No. < 5cm%
of the pit shall be sloped or the shored excavation B 47 All footings
shall be employed td check against any possible B, 40 90 cm*
B? 60
slides in case of deep excavation when the depth of
83 57
the boulder stratum is large (10 to 15 m), with X3
BA
large size of the pit (15 x 15 m). Large pits are
necessary when heavy structures are founded on
bouldery soils. FIG.~ INFLUENCEOFINTERSTITIALMATERIALQN
THE LOAD CARRYING CAPACITY OF BOULDER
5.2 Soil Classification and Sampling - Due to the SOILS
native nature of the material, the undisturbed
sampling is not possible for identification and The entire excavated soil is carefully collected
testing purposes. During the course of excavation weighed with the help of a spring balance (100 kg
of the technical pit, disturbed samples shall be capacity). The pit is then be covered with a
COMPENDIUM OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOlI,

ENGINEERING - PART 2 119
IS loo42 : 1981
polyethylene sheet large anough to touch the sides

and the base of the pit. The pit is filled with known
volume of water up to the surface of the pit [IS
2720 (Part 33) : 19711. The density is calculated ROD
from the known mass and volume of the soil.
Sometimes dry clean sand may also be well
adopted to measure the volume of the excavated
soil. The collected soil mayqalso be used for grain
size analysis and soil classification.
5.4 Dynamic Cone Penetration Test (DCPT) -

This test [IS 4968 (Part 1) : 19761 shall be
performed, if the aggregate size is not larger than CLEARANCE
100 to 120 mm. The test set-up is similar to that in
the standard penetration test, the standard SPT
Sampler being’replaced by a push fit cast iron cone
with 60” apex angle and base diameter 62.5 mm.
Use of cone of this size ensure sufficient clearance
(11.36 mm) with the standard A drill .rod and helps -CONE

in reducing friction on the rod (see Fig. 5). The
cone is driven from the level of the footing with a
65 kg hammer dropping from a height of 750 mm
The number of blows for every 15 cm shall be
counted and a plot between cumulative number of ~0 62.5 c
blows N” and D/B, is prepared. A typical plot is
shown in Fig. 6. All dimensions in millimetres.
FIG. 5 DIAGRAMMATIC SKETCH OF 62.5 mm DIA
NO- - fn order to avoid damage to the equipment, driving CONE
may be stoppedwhenthe numberof blows for the last 30 cm is
100. Assemblyof the equipmentshall be in accordance with thereafter at hourly intervals. Each load increment
Fig. 2 of IS 4%8 (Part 2) : 1976.
shall be kept for not less than Ih or up to a time
when the rate of deformation gets reduced
5.5 Load Test on Cast in-situ Footing - appreciably (to a value of 0.02 mm/min). The
Considering the large size of aggregates involved, deformation shall be taken as the average of 4 dial
large sized footing need to be used in the test. Steel gauges readings. The next increment of load shall
plates are not of much use because of seating then be applied and the observation repeated: The.
difficulties. Best results are obtained with cast test should be continued till a deformation of
in-situ concrete blocks or with precast blocks, set 50 mm is reached or till failure occurs, whichever
with fresh mortar, so that there is perfect bond is earlier.Aminimum of eight load increments shall
between the soil and the block. be applied to obtain a well defined load settlement
The size of the footing shall be such that it will curve. Typical graphs are shown in Fig. 2. A typical
span over several boulders so as to mobilize group set is shown in Fig. 7.
action under load. To satisfy this criterion, the
minimum size of the footing shall not be less than
If needed, rebound observation may be taken
10 times the average grain size to a minimum of
while releasing the load in a similar manner.
150 cm.
Nom - The maximum limit may be increased depending

5.6 In-situ Shear Test - The test best suited for
lpon feasibility. such type of deposit to determine strength
parameter is in-situ shear test. It consists in
The footing shall be loaded using dead load shearing a block of sample under a given normal
Kentledges platform through a hydraulic jack (100 load. The in-situ test is a simple form of laboratory
tonnes capacity). The deformation shall be shear box test. The interpretation of test results
measured with 4 dial gauges (0.001 mm) in causes difficulties, as identical samples are not
accordance with IS 1888 : 1982. For each likely to be available for many tests under different
increment of load, the deformaiion shall be noted loads. Two types of tests have been found suitable
after intervals of 1, 4, 10, 20, 40 and 60 min and for such deposits.
120 COMPENDIUMOF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERING - PART 2

IS 10042 : 1981
CUMULATIVE NO.OF BLOWS ($1
LO 60 120 160 200 240 260 320 360
2 30
‘i
K
_ LQ
LDU
‘0 50

60
FIG. 6 TYPICAL PLOT OF DEPTH/WIDTH (D/B,) RATIO AND

CUMULATIVE NO OF BLOWS (N”)
5.7 Boulder-Boulder Test (BBT)*- It consists in same. The test set-up for both types of tests and
cutting a block of boulder soil and slowly confining sample results are shown in Fig. 8,9 and 10.
it into a rigid well-designed steel former [IS
5.9 Sample Size - In the case of Boulder-Boulder
7746 : 1975 and IS 2720 (Part 39/Set 1) : 19771.
Test (BBT), the minimum size of the sample shall
This soil block is sheared under a normal load.
not be less than 10 times the average size of
Then the shear (kg/cm2) is plotted against
boulders or 120 x 120 cm, whichever is less. The
displacement (mm).
height of the sample shall however, be kept at 30
5.8 Concrete-Boulder Test (CBT) * - This test, to 45 cm, depending upon the average aggregate
similar to that recommended in IS 7746 : 1975 size. The minimum size of the concrete block in
consists in casting a reinforced block and pushing CBT shall also be 120 x 120 cm in plan and the
it laterally under a given normal load. thickness may be kept 1s30 cm.
For a shear stress, the corresponding NOTE - The size may be increased, depending upon
displacement is noted and the shear stress feasibility IS 2720 (Part 39/Set 2) : 1979
(kgf/cm2) - displacement (mm) curve is plotted. 5.10 Application of Normal Load-The sample in
This test has the advantage that it eliminates the BBT or the concrete block in CBT shall be sujected
need for a steel former and an undisturbed soil to a normal load equal to the overburden pressure
block. The’concrete blocks used for load test, can or the anticipated normal load. The load on the
also be used for this purpose. Precast concrete sample may be placed in the form of 20 kg concrete
blocks may also be used after they are seated with cubes. Alternatively, sand bags of known weights
mortar on the foundation bed. may also be used. However, the intensity of the
The residual shear stress (7,). values obtained normal load shall not exceed two times the shear
from both types of tests (BBT and CBT) are the strength of the soil, to avoid a bearing capacity
type of failure.
* The minimum number of tests depends on the area over NOTE - For the sample likely to be sheared under hlgn
which the structure has to come and uniformity of strata. normal loads for the angle of shearing resistance, if considered,
However, in the normal case a minimum of two tests are the procedure outlined in IS 7746 : 1975 and IS 2720 (Part
required. 39/Set 21-1979 may be followed.
COMPENDIUMOFINDlANSTANDARDSONSOIL ENGINEERING-PART2 121

IS 10042 : 1981
0 = DEPTH OF FOOTING
G = SIZE OF FOOTING
STRATA 2
bfJ4

STRATA 2
1. Overburden soil 14. Flexible pipe

2. Boulder deposit 15. M.S. channel/wooden sleepers
3. Cast in-situ concrete footing 16. Column
4. M.S. plates 17. Pressure indicator
5. Hydraulic jack 18. Jack handle
6. Dialguage stand 19. Pump for the jack
7. Datum bar 20. M.S. plates/wooden sleepers
8. Magnetic base 21. Loading bags
9. Dial gauge rod 22. Loadingmaterial (excavated soil)
10. Dial gauge 23. M.S. sheets
11. Proving ring 24. Sleepers
12. Spacer plates 25. Girder
13. Main girder
FIG. 7 In-situ FULL SIZE FOOTING TEST
6. ALLOWABLE SOIL PRESSURE shall be assumed in accordance with the type of

6.1 LoadTest -The allowable soil pressure from structure to be constructed. The values of N, and
one or two load tests shall be obtained as outlined D shall be taken from Fig. 6.
in 4.3 and 5.5. These load tests shall be used to 6.3 In-situ Shear Tests - The allowable pressure
confirm results from other large number of less (qa) shall be computed from the residual shear
expensive tests such as dynamic cone penetration stress values (4) obtained from in-situ shear tests
tests (DCPT) and in-situ shear tests (BBT or (BBT or CBT) using the following equation:
CBT), particularly when the site under
L!+E
Izy
investigation is large. qa=(X)7, . . . . . . (2)
6.2 Dynamic Cone Penetration Test - The results [
of dynamic cone penetration test [IS 4968 (Part 1) where
* 19761 shall be used to compute allowable pressure x= constant, 6.25 for a deformation of
i%) from the following equation when the 12 mm and 8 for a deformation of 25
maximum grain size is not exceeding 100 mm: mm. The value of the width of the
footing (B) shall be assumed
1 ,,,s, . . . . . . . . (1)
depending upon the situation and type
qa= %i DBf of structure.
[ 1
In Equation (l), tne value of allowable 7. LABORATORY TEST
deformation S, (cm) and the footing width Bf (m) 7.1 Soil Sampling - Owing to the nature of the
122 COMPENDlUMOFINDIANSTANDARDSONSOILENGINEERlNG-PART2
..,..
..-..
P 6
.
,.
.
J
. . . . .. . . ;
. .
.
-
.
au+.
.:
.
. .
**.
.
.’
i’:‘-*
‘. f
. ._
*-, . . .
:
‘.“..:,. 0
DEPTH OF SOIL
UNDISTURBED BOULDER SAMPL

INSlOE THE RIG10 FORMER
)c-7s TO eo-----_rl BOULOERY SOIL b-75 TO 60-d
1. Datum bar 5. Steel shear box tl

9. 20 T capacity proving ring 12. Steefplates
2. Magnetic‘holder Boulder gravel sample 16. Pump for the jack
6. Hydraulic jack 20 T capacity
w
10. 13. Wooden sleepers 17. Handle for the jack
.3
4.
Dial guage
Angle iron stiffeners
7.
8.
Filler material
Steelplates
11. Wooden sleeper support 14. Flexible pipe P
h)
for jack 15. Steel weights/concrete blocks/sand bags ..
All dimensions in centimetres ti

L
FIG. 8 TEST SET-UP SHOWING DETAILS OF BOULDER-BOULDER TEST

.. . :... . . :*-.
-0 ‘:.... . -
: /.’
. :.OVER&i6Ek-i:
*..1.’ , , SOI!. . -: .: -
. . .... I . . ) . : .
BOULOERY
SOIL
k7S 70 80 b ,--d e-73 TO 80

4
BOULDERY SOIL
I
, I- 120 -------4
y
ti 280
1. Datum bar 4. Dial guage 7. Hydraulic jack 20 T capacity 10. Wnnd sleeper 13. Pump for lack
2. Magnetic base 5. Concrete sample 8. Wooden sleeper support for jack 11. Flexible pipe 14. Steel weights/concrete
3. Stand for dial gauge 6 Proving ring 9. Steel platks 12. Handle for jack blocks/sand bags
All ditnensions in CenthCtrCS.
Fr(;.9
TESTSET-UPSHOWING DETAILSOF~ONCRETE-BOULDERTEST
Is loo42: 1981
O-6
“0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55
HORIZONTAL DISPLACXMENT, mm
FIG. 10 COMPARISIONOF BBT AND CBT SHEAR STRESS

boulder-y soil, undisturbed sampling is not possible 7.2 Grain Size Analysis - The only laboratory
and hence only disturbed samples form the test conducted on disturbed samples of boulder-y
technical pit shall be collected from different soils is the grain size distribution using appropriate
elevations. The quantity of samples from each IS sieves to separate boulder/cobbles/gravel
depth shall be large enough (1 000 kg) to reflect (> 4.75 mm) and matrix (C 4.75 mm).
the actual soil proportions. The material above
particle size 80 mm shall be separated and its
grading establish-ed in the. field itself. However, 7.2.1 From the known quantity of the samples
the material below particle size 80 mm- shall be collected, and the grain size analysis, the overall
collected in suitable containers (gunny bags) and proportion of the boulder/gravelshall be collected.
properly labelled immediately, as given in This shall be used in dedding if the boulder/gravel
Appendix E of IS 1892 : 1979. lies in the matrix of material or vice versa.
COMPf$~IUM OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERING - PART 2

IS 11593 : 1986
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION FOR
SHEAR BOX (LARGE) FOR TESTING OF SOILS
0. FOREWORD 2. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
0.1 The Indian Standards Institution has already 2.1 The shear box shall consist of the following
published a series of standards on methods of (see Fig. 1) :
testing soils. It has been recognized that reliable a) Upper and lower parts of the shear box
and intercomparable test results can be obtained coupled together with two pins,
only with standard testing equipment capable of b) Grid plates - 2 pairs,
giving the desired level of accuracy. Series of c) Spacer plates,
Indian Standards covering the specifications of d) Base plate,
equipments used for testing soils are therefore e) Loading pad, and
being formulated to’encourage their development

f) Water jacket.
and manufacture in the country. j “ii
3. MATERIALS i,:I/‘:+
0.2 The equipment covered in this standard is
3.1 The material used for the construction@the
used as a part of the assembly for the equipment
different component of shear box shall be as given
used for the laboratory determination of shear
in Table 1.
strength of the soil [see IS 2720 (Part 39/Set 1) :
19771. 4. SHAPE AND DIMENSIONS
4.1 The shape and dimensions of the various
1. SCOPE
components of the shear box shall be as given in
1.1 The equipment covered in this standard is Fig. 2 to 7. The tolerance to the dimensions shall
used as a part of the assembly for the equipments be as given in IS 2102 (Part 1) : 1980 and shall be
used for laboratory determination of direct shear of medium class.
strength of the soil material with particle size up to
5. MARKING
25 mm, that is, soils containing MOOTU~S,sands,
gravels and other aggregates. 5.1 The following information shall be clearly and
PIN
/
. /rUPPER HALF OF SHEAR BOX
LO ADING PAD
\LOWER HALF OF SHEAR BOX
FIG. 1 SHEAR Box (LARGE) ASSEMBLY

IS 11593 : 1986
TABLE 1 MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTION OF DIFFERENT

COMPONENTS PARTS OF SHEAR BOX
SL COMPONENT MATERIAL REFERENCETO~NDIAN

40. STANDARD
Upper and lower parts Mild steel IS : 513-1973
i)
of shear box 7, >?
ii) Grid plates - 2 pairs >1
0
iii) Spacer plates >>
7,
iv) Base plate >.
3,
v) Loading pad 7,
3,
vi) Water jacket

I
L W-2 HOLES
mimuGH HO(OLEI
\
Ll-12, LOOEEP
l.HOLES
2A Upper Half of Shear Box 28 Lower Half of Shear Box
FIG. 2 DETAILS OF UPPER AND LOWER HALVES OF SHEAR Box
indelibily marked on each component of (Certification Marks) Act and the Rules and Regulations made
thereunder. The IS1 Mark on products covered by an Indian
equipment :
Standard conveys the assurance that they have been produced
a) Name of the manufacturer or his registered to comply with the requirements of that standard under a
trade-mark; and well-defined system of inspection, testing and quality control
b) Date of manufacture. which is devised and supervised by ISI and operated by the
5.1.1 The equipment may also be marked with by IS1 for conformity to that standard as a further safeguard.
Details of conditions under which a licence for the use of the ISI
ISI Certification Mark. Certification Mark may be granted to manufacturers or
NOTE -The use of the IS1 Certification Mark is governed processors may be obtained from the Indian Standards
by the provisions of the Indian Standardi Institution Institution.
127
IS 11593: 19&i

FIG. 3 SPACERPLATE
COMPENDIUMOFlNDlANSTANDARDSONSOILENGINEERINC-PART2
IS 11593: 1986

FIG.~ GRIDPLATE
COMPENDlUM OF'INDIAN S’rANDARDS ON SOIL ENGIKEERING -PART 2 129

IS 11593: 1986

r-no TAWCO HOlLS
Fro. 5 BASE PLATE

FIG. 6 WATER JACKET
All dimensions m mllhmetres.

FIG. 7 LOADING PAD

IS 2720 (Part 39/Set 2) : 1979
(Reaffirmed 1987)
Zndian Standard
PART 39 DIRECT SHEAR TEST FOR SOILS
CONTAINING GRAVEL
Section 2 In-Situ Shear Test
0. FOREWORD 2.3 Hydraulic Jack - Suitable remote control

hydraulic jack of adequate capacity for applying
0.1 With a view to establishing uniform shear force.
procedures for the determination of different
characteristics of soils and also for facilitating a 2.4 Rolled Steel Joist and Wooden
comparative study of the results. the Indian Sleepers - Adequate number of rolled steel joist
Standards Institution is bringing out this Indian and wooden sleepers and sand bags for making a
Standard on methods of test for \oils (IS 2720) platform and providing adequate kentledge for

which is being published in parts. Fortyone parts applying normal load on the sample.
of this standard have been published so far. This 2.5 Rollers - Suitable size of rollers equal to the
part covers direct shear test. The test is of two width of plates forming the shear box frame to be
kinds depending upon the state of samples, placed in between the side of the box and a bed
namely, laboratory test and in-situ test. The plate on either side of the box.
laboratory test is covered in Section 1 of this part.
This part deals with in-situ determination by direct 2.6 Datum Bars - Suitable section of steel bars
shear, the shear strength of soils containing gravel to be hinged for two pegs fixed at a distance equal
and cobblestone. to the side of the box driven to a depth of minimum
500 mm on.either side of the box.
0.2 In the formulation of this standard due
weightage has been given to international 2.7 Spring Balance - Spring balance of 10 kg
co-ordination among the standards and practices capacity of sensitivity 1.0 kg to weigh the sand
prevailing in different countries in addition to bags.
relating it to the practices in the field in this 3. PREPARATION OF SPECIMEN
country.
3.1 A steel box made out of mild steel plates of
1. SCOPE adequate thickness, provided with a cutting edge
1.1 This standard (Part 39/Set 2) covers the with the required internal dimension may be used
m&hod for the determination by direct shear, the for trimming the sample. This hollow box be
in-situ shear strength of soils containing gravels pressed into the deposit under a load applied by
and cobblestone. hydraulic jack (see Fig. 3). The soil around the box
be excavated, simultaneously with the penetration
2. APPARATUS of the box to facilitate its easy sinking. Care shall
2.1 Shear Box - The side of the shear box shall be taken to ensure that the box shall sink in vertical
be not less than 10 times the maximum expected position.
particle size and the thickness of the samples not 3.1.1 Alternatively, during excavation two
less than three times the maximum particle size. blocks, of the required size be left undisturbed at
For convenience in handling the box could be of the desired position. After the excavation is
built-up sections from plates. The four sides of the completed the assembled boxes shall be put on the
box could be connected through bolts and nuts top of the block and soil below the plate shall be
designed properly to form the box. Figure 1 shows excavated gradually till the boxes reach the
the suggested size with 1500 x 1500 mm sample required position.
size.
3.2 Two rolled steel joists from the bed plates. A
2.2 Top Loading Plate (see Fig. 2) - A rigid steel train of rollers shall be put in between the sides of
plate fitting in the shear box suitably designed to the box and the bed plates on either side of the
distribute the load uniformly over the sample box. Gravels projecting above box frames shall be
normal to the shear plane removed and the gap shall be filled up with

IS 2720 (Part 39&c 2) : 1979
lli
C
C
”
c

/ LOADING FACE
18mm BOLTS
SECTION XX
NOTE - All ~ut~~Lvc~s

fabricated out of 10 mm thick plates.
FIG. 1 SHEAR Box 1 500 X 1 500 mm SIZE
medium to fine sand to give level surface for better depending upon type of soils.
seating of the top plate.
4. APPLICATION OF NORMAL LOAD
3.3 The loading cap befitting the internal
4.1 The normal load on the sample shall be
dimension of the box made of steel plates of
applied with the help of a platform made of rolled
adequate thickness be placed on the soil.
steel joist and wooden sleepers and loaded with
3.4 The test should be carried out at moisture sand bags (see Fig. 4).
content as close to field condition as possible.
5. TEST PROCEDURE
NOTE - In case of soils containing fines more than 12 precent,
the test may be conducted in soaked s$tc to stimulate for worst 5.1 The shear force shall be applied through a
field conditions; the soaking period may extend up to 4 days remote control hydraulic jack and proving ring
COMPENDIUM OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGlNEERING - PART 2 133

IS 2720 (Part 39/Set 2) : 1979
# 20mm
BAR FOR LIFTING

WELD
SECTION XX
Nom - All members fabricated out of 10 mm thick plates.

FIG. 2 TOPLOADINGPLATE
arrangement taking reactlon from the adjacent box increment ot shear load under the normal load
(see Fig. 4). each increment of shear load shall be maintained
5.2 Two tests at different normal pressures shall constant till the equilibrium conditions are
be carried out at one location. After the block with reached, the readings shall be recorded with the
lesser normal pressure failed, the space between help of suitably mounted dial gauges. The next
the failed block and the side of the pit shall be increment of shear load shall then be applied and
blocked by boulders and also by struting. The the process continued till the failure of the
normal load on failed block shall be increased, and specimen occurs. The normal loads applied shall
then the test on the other block shall be completed be more than the existing over-burden and cover
by taking reaction of shear force from the failed the anticipated loading range in the area. The
block. range of normal load should represent the site
loading conditions as far as possible. Two more
5.3 The jack shall be so fitted so that the
tests at different normal loads shall be carried out
application of the lateral load occurs as far as
at adjacent location, to make four tests, a
possible near to the plane of shear.
minimum number required necessary for
5.4 The test shall be conducted by giving an equal interpretation.
134 COMPENDIUM OF INDIA% STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERiNG - PART 2

.
IS 2720 (Part 39Bec 2) : 1979

FIG.3 ARRANGEMENTFOR~BTAINING~PECIMEN FORIN-STTUSHEARTEST
PROPOSED
FOUNDATION
__-_- LEVEL
OF SHEAR
FIG. 4 TEST SET UP FOR LARGE SIZE--IN!-SITUSHEAR TEST
6. CALCULATION AND REPORT corresponding horizontal displacement and

applied normal stress shall be recorded for each
6.1 Results of test shall be recorded suitably. A test and the result be presented in the form of a
recommended proforma for recording the results graph in which the applied normal stress is plotted
is given in Appendix A. as abscissa and shear stress as ordinate. The angle
which the resulting straight line makes with the
6.2 The horizontal displacement at a particular horizontal axis and the intercept which the straight
load shall be recorded from shear displacement line makes with the vertical axis shall be reported
dial readings. as the angle of shearing resistance and cohesion
6.3 The maximum shear force shall be peak load respectively.
from load displacement curve or where the tangent NATE- The normal stress versus maximum shear stress
of flater portion of the later part of the curve relationship may not be straight line in all cases. In such cases
leaves in case the curve does not give peak point. the shear parameter shall be obtained by drawing tangent to
the normal stress andmaximum shear stress curve at the point
6.4 The maximum shear stress and the of normai srress expected in the field.
COMPENDIUM
OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERING - PART 2 135
IS 2720 (Part 39/&c 2) : 1979
APPENDIX A
(Clause 6.1)
I PROFORMA FOR RECORDING IN-SITU TEST RESULTS
Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ......
... Location of sample .........................................
Rate of load Specimen No ..................................................
increment ..........................
Depth of test.. ..................................................
Proving ring No ...............................................
Providing ring constant ......................................
Normal load applied .........................................
SOIL SPECIMEN MEASUREMENT

Dimensions ............................ Maximum size of particle ..................................
Initial water content ................ Area of specimen .......................................
Final water content ................. Height of specimen ...........................................
Volume of specimen .........................................
Unit weight of soil.. ..........................................
II PROFORMA FOR RECORDING SHEARING STAGE
i) Thickness of sample .......................................mm

ii) Area of cross section of sample ........................ .cm2
iii) Rate of shearing ............................................mm/min
iv) Normal stress applied .....................................kg/cm’
Date Shear Dis- Shear Dis- Averake Proving Shear Shear Vertical Vertical
& placement placement Shear Ring Force Stress Reading Displacement
Time Dial Reading Displace- Reading
ment
, ,. \
ID
I,, Du Dh, Dhz
Average
Vertical
Displace-
ment
Plot - Shear stress versus shear displacement and find :

a) maximum shear stress at the peak of curve, and
b) corresponding shear displacement

IS 2720 (Part 39/See 2) : 1979
III PROFORMA FOR RECORDING SUMMARY OF RESULTS
Test Normal Proving Shear Stress Shear Initial Final Water Remarks
No. Stress Ring at Failure Displace- Water Content
Constant ment at Content
Failure

Plot - Shear stress-normal stress relationship to obtain :
a) cohesion intercept, and
b) angle of shearing resistance.

Determination of CBR
SECTION 10
IS 2720 (Part 31) : 1969
/n&an Standard
PART 31 FIELD DETERMINATION OF
CALIFORNIA BEARING RATIO
(Incorporating Amendment No. I)
0. FOREWORD loading jack with swivel head for applymg load to

0.1 The bearing ratio test (generally known as the the penetration piston. The device should have an
California bearing ratio test) is an ad hoc arrangement for attaching to truck, tractor, truss
penetration test used for the evaluation of or any other equipment used to provide load
strengths of sub-grade and bases for roads and reaction. The jack should be such that a uniform
runway pavements. The results obtained by these penetration rate of 1.25 mm/min can be achieved.
tests are used in conjunction with empirical curves, The capacity of the jack should not be less than
based on experience for the design of flexible 5 OOOkg.
pavements. The test gives empirical strength

3.2 Equipment for Providing Reaction for
values which may not be directly related to Loading - Truck, tractor, truss or any other
fundamental properties governing the strength of suitable equipment. If truck or tractor is used they
soil. should be loaded suitably to give the necessary
0.1.1 The test is either performed in the reaction. If truss is used it should be suitably
laboratory on undisturbed or recompacted soil anchored.
specimens or directly in the field. Where facilities 3.3 Jacks - Two track-type jacks of 5 to 12
for reaction loading are not available undisturbed tonnes capacity and having double acting
samples may be obtained and tested in ‘the combination trip and automatic lowering in cases
laboratory. The laboratory procedure has been-, where loaded truck or tractor is used for providing
covered in IS 2720 (Part 16) : 1979. the necessary reaction.
1. SCOPE 3.4 Proving Ring - One calibrated proving ring
1.1 This standard (Part 31) covers the method for of capacity 5 000 kg with a dial gauge to read to an
the determination of the bearing ratio (generally accuracy of 0.002 mm and having a travel of 5 mm.
known as the California bearing ratio) of soils The proving ring should have an accuracy of half
in-place for the evaluation of strengths of percent of the load measured.
sub-grade and bases for roads and runway 3.5 Metal Penetration Piston - 50 f 0.1 mm in
pavements. diameter and not less than 100 mm long.
2. TERMINOLOGY 3.6 Extensions - Internally threaded pipe or rod
2.0 For the purpose of this standard, the extensions not less than 200 cm long furnished in
definitions given in IS 2809 : 1972 and the the following quantities and lengths :
following definitions shall apply. Length of Number of
2.1 Bearing Ratio - (Generally known as Extension (see Note) Extensions
cm
California bearing ratio or CBR.) The ratio of the
force per unit area required to penetrate a soil 5 2
mass with a standard circular piston at the rate of 10 2
30 1
1.25 mm/min to that required for corresponding
50 1
penetration of a standard material.
100 1
2.2 Standard Load - Load which has been
obtained from the test on crushed stone which is Nom - Other convenient lengths may also be used.
defined as having a bearing ratio of 100 percent
3.7 Connectors - For coupling the penetration
(see 5.2).
piston and proving ring assembly either directly or
3. APPARATUS through extension pieces.
3.1 Loading Device - A mechanical screw 3.8 Dial Gauge - Reading to 0.01 or 0.02 mm

IS 2720 (Part 31) ; 1969
having a travel of 25 mm, for measuring the placed over two rigid supports. The screw jack
penetration of the piston. with swivel should be installed to the underside of
the equipment providing reaction, at the correct
3.9 Dial Gauge Support - Rigid end of steel position for the test. The proving ring should be
angle welded construction or light alloy pipe connected to the bottom end of the jack and the
construction about 2 m long, of overall height 30 piston connecior to the bottom of the proving ring.
cm and 45 cm wide at the feet with universal or The piston should then be connected using lengths
ordinary dial gauge holder adjustable anywhere of extension pipes or rods, if necessary. It should
along the length of the support. be ensured that the entire assembly is plumb and
3.10 Surcharge Weight - One annular metal the loading jack should be clamped in position.
weight weighing 5 kg and of 250 mm diameter with 4.4 The surcharge annular weight of 5 kg should
a central hole 53 mm in diameter. Two circular be kept in position on the surface to be tested so
slotted weights of weiglit 5 kg and of diameter 215 that when the piston is lowered it will pass through
to 250 mm with a central hole and slot width of 53 the hole in the annular weight. The penetration
mm. Two circular slotted weights of weight 10 kg piston should be seated with the smallest possible
and of diameter 215 to 250 mm with a central hole load but in no case in excess of a total load of 4 kg
and slot width of 53 mm. or 0.002 kg/mm* so that full contact is established
3.11 Miscellaneous Apparatus - Other general between the piston and the surface to be tested.

apparatus, such as spirit level, pick, spade, scoop For materials with irregular surface the piston may
and brush, apparatus for moisture determination be seated on a thinnest practical layer of fine
[see IS 2720 (Part 2) : 1973 ] and density limestone screenings or plaster of paris spread over
determination [see IS 2720 (Part 28) : 1974 and the surface.
IS 2720 (Part 29) : 19751. 4.5 While seating load is on the piston a 3 to 6 mm
layer of clean sand should be spread over the
4. PROCEDURE surface to be covered by the surcharge annular
4.1 The general surface area to be tested should weight. This helps in distributing the surcharge
be exposed, cleaned of all loose and dried material load over the surface uniformly.
and levelled. Extreme care shall be taken not to 4.6 Surcharge weights, sufficient to produce an
disturb the test surface. The spacing of the tests intensity of loading equal to the weight of the base
should be such that operations in one area do not material and pavement, except that the minimum
disturb the soil in the other area. For testing weight applied should be 15 kg including that of
operations this spacing may range from 15 to 20 cm the annular weight [ this weight gives an intensity
in cohesive soils and 35 to 40 cm in cohesionless of, loading approximately equal to that in the
soils, for the penetration piston used in the test. laboratory bearing ratio test, see IS 2720 (Part
4.2 If actual service conditions in the field 16): 19651 should be applied. The penetration
warrant: the surface to be tested may be soaked to indicating dial should be suitably fixed for reading
the desired degree using surcharge weights, if the penetration and the dial set to zero. A
necessary. The test surface should be drained of all diagramatic set up of the test is shown in Fig. 1.
free water and allowed to stand for at least 15
4.7 Load shall be applied on the penetration
minutes before starting further operations.
piston so that the penetration is approximately
4.3 The equipment used to provide load reaction 1.25 mm/min. The load readings shall be recorded
(truck, tractor, truss etc), should be so located that atpenetrationsof0,0.5,1.0,1.5,2.0,2.5,3.0,4.0,
the centre of the beam against which the loading 5.0, 7.5, lO.O.and 12.5 mm. The maximum load
jack will work is over the centre of the surface to be and penetration shall be recorded if it occurs for a
tested. If loaded truck or tractor is used for penetration less than 12.5 mm. The set up may
providing the necessary reaction, the rear wheels then be dismantled.
of the truck or tractor should be completely raised
by means of the track type jacks placed below the 4.8 After completion of the test, a sample shall be
frame of the body near the wheels in order to avoid obtained at the point of penetration, for moisture
the loss of loading effort which would otherwise be content determination. The moisture content shall
spent on the flexing of the axial springs of %he be determined in accordance with IS 2720 (Part
vehicle at the time of testing. In order to avoid 2) : 1973. The in-place density shall be determined
accidents due to the failure of jacks near the wheels in accordance with IS 2720 (Part 28) : 1974 or
and the lifting of the vehicle at higher Loads, the IS 2720 (Part 29) : 1975 about 15 cm away from
rear’ side of the body of the vehicle should be the point of penetration.
142 COMPENDIUM OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERINd- PART 2

IS 2720 (Part 31) : 1969
TRUCK ATTACHME NT
CLAMP
PROVING RING

EXTENSION ROD
CLAMP
A.DJUSTABLE POST
ANNULAR bOIi4T NIPPLE L UNIVERSAL DIAL

SURCHAPGE WEIGHT OF DATUM BAR
‘/ GAUGE CLAMP
LSLOTTED SURCHARGE WEIGHT
FIG. 1 FIELD CALIFORNIA BEARING RATIO APPARATUS
5. CALCULATIONS with the convex portion of the original curve with

5.1 Load Penetration Curve - The load the origin of strains shifted to the point where the
penetration curve shall be plotted (see Fig. 2). This tangent cuts the horizontal strain axis as illustrated
curve will be mainly convex upwards although the in Fig. 2.
initial portion of the curve may be concave
upwards due to surface.irregularities. A correction 5.2 Bearing Ratio - Corresponding to the
shall then be applied by drawing a tangent to the penetration value at which the bearing ratio is
curve at the point of greatest slope. The corrected desired, corrected load values shall be taken from
curve shall be taken to be this tangent together the load penetration curve and the bearing ratio

IS 2720 (Part 31) : 1969
TABLE1 STANDARD LOAD

(Clause 5.2)
PENETRATION UNIT STANDARD TOTAL STANDARD
DEPTH LOAD LOAD
kgf/cm' kgf
E 70 1370
5.0 105 2055
7.5 134 2 630
10.0 162 3 is0
12.5 183 3600
52.1 The bearing ratios are usually calculated

for penetrations of 2.5 mm and 5 mm. Generally
the bearing ratio at 2.5 mm penetrations will be
greater than that at 5 mm penetration and in such
a case the former shall be taken as the bearing
ratio for design purposes. If the bearing ratio
corresponding to a penetration of 5 mm exceeds
that for 2.5 mm, the test shall be repeated. If

identical results follow, the bearing ratio
corresponding to 5 mm penetration shall be taken
for design.
Wf 1 I I I I
OO 2*5 5*0 T-5 IO*0 12.5 6. REPORT
PENETRATION IN mm
6.1 The bearing ratio shall be reported correct to
the first decimal place. The details in the
recommendeci proforma for the record of test
FIG. 2 CORRECTIONOF LOAD PENETRATION results given in Appendix A shall be given.
CURVES
7. NUMBER OF FIELD TESTS
7.1 Three in-place bearing ratio tests shall be
calculated as follows :
performed at each elevation to be tested.
However, if the results of the three tests in any
group do not show reasonable agreement, three
Bearing ratio = g X 100
s additional tests shall be made at the same location
where and numerical average of the six tests shall be used
as the bearing ratio at that location. A reasonable
agreement between the minimum and maximum
P, = corrected unit (or total) test load
values of three tests where the bearing ratio is less
corresponding to the chosen
than 10, permits a tolerance of 3; from 10 to 30, a
penetration value read from the load
tolerance of 5; from 30 to 60, a tolerance of 10; and
penetration curve, in kgf/cm’; and
greater than.60, a tolerance of 25. If it is known
Ps = unit (or total) standard load for the same that a single value is erratic for any reason, the test
depth of penetration as per P, taken value should be discarded and another test
from Table 1, in kgf/cm2. performed.
144 c0w~~m~b1 OF INDI.~Nsr4NDlBDs ON so11, ENGIN~XRING - PART2

IS 2720 (Part 31) : 1969
APPENDIX A
(Clause 6.1)
PROFORMA FOR IN-PLACE BEARING RATIO TEST
Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Tested by ,.........................................

Material at test point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Depth of test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
soaked
Condition of test surface :
unsoaked
Periodof soaking, if any . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Surcharge weight used during soaking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Moisture content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ....
Method used for determination of density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Penetration test

Surcharge weight used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NJXRATION
GAUGEREADINGS
Bearingratioat 2.5 mmpenetration 1

2 Average
31
Bearing ratio at 5 mm penetration 1

2 Average
31
Rejected test with reasons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Result of repeat test, if conducted.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . , . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
COMPENDIUM OF INDIAN STANDARD!3 ON SOIL ENGINEERING-PART2

IS:10379:1982
(Reafmmd 1988)
Zndian Standard
CODE OF PRACTICE
FOR FJELD CONTROL OF MOISTURE AND COMPACTION OF
SOILS FOR EMBANKMENT AND SUBGRADE ’
0. FOREWORD 2.3 Method 3 - In certain weathered soils, field

moisture content and dry density differ from the
0.1 The earthwork involved in embankments and laboratory compaction value% In such soils, a test
subgrades has to be controlled so that the average embankment under nearly identical operating
properties of the soil are equal to those adopted in conditions for thickness of soil, watering, mixing
design. A number of field control methods have and compacting is used to determine field moisture
been evolved. This standard covers such methods content and dry density attainable. The specified
and also gives guidance for use in various

layer of soil should be spread on a test strip
situations. It is suggested that the tests mentioned 3x 10 m, watered and left for 5 to 30 minutes
in. this standard are conducted at regular intervals depending upon type before rolling. The water
so that the results are available for every 1000 m* content is varied in layers within + 6 percent of
of earth file. laboratory values. Each strip is rolled by the roller
and the density of soil is measured by either of the
1. SCOPE
methods mentioned in 2.1 after every two passes.
A graph of the number of passes against dry
1.1 This standard covers various methods of field
density is drawn for each water content. A graph
control of compaction and moisture contents of
of maximum dry density attained when plotted
soil for embankment and subgrade.
against water content gives field moisture content
and attainable field dry density. The trial gives a
2. METHODS APPLICABLE TO
minimum number of passes of compaction roller
NON-GRAVELLY SOILS
which at field moisture content will give maximum
dry density.
2.1 Method 1 - In this method, compaction
parameters, that is, optimum moisture content and Based on this test embankment, indirect
maximum dry density are determined according to control of number of passes with controlled water
the procedure described in IS 2720 (Part 7) : 1980 using any one of the methods for determining the
and IS 2720 (Part 8) : 1974. The in-situ moisture moisture content [IS 2720 (Part 21) : 19731 can be
content of compacted soil is determined by one of used for the earthwork.
the procedures given in IS 2720 (Part 2) : 1973.
The field dry density is determined by any one of
3. METHOD APPLICABLE TO SOIL
the methods given in IS 2720 (Part 28) : 1974, IS
CONTAINING GRAVELS AND ROCKFILLS
2720 (Part 29) : 1975 or IS 2720 (Part 34) : 1972.
The test shall be performed after removing the top
5 cm layer of earth. 3.1 In addition to the methods given for
non-gravelly soils, the following provisions shall
The compaction efficiency is then obtained by
be applicable.
expression of field density-laboratory maximum
dry density.
3.2 The total density of soil increases and moisture
2.2 Method 2 - This method allows the content decreases with increasing percentage of
determination of the relationship between the gravel size fraction up to 60 to 75 percent and
embankment moistur&?-ontent, dry density and above this value density again decreases.
the laboratory optimum conditions without the
necessity of measurement of water content and the 3.3 For the soils with gravels up to 30 percent,
results can be obtained in less than one hour. This recommended method is to establish moisture
method, as given in IS 2720 (Part 38) : 1976 can density relationship [see IS 2720 (Part 7) : lY80
be used directly for both moisture and density and IS 2720 (Part 8) : 19741 in the laboratory on
controls or only density control. soil fraction passing 40 mm IS Sieve. The

1s : 10379: 1982
embankment density may be compared with the 3.4 As shear strength of compacted gravel and
laboratory density so obtained. The field density rockfill does not vary much with small changes in
and the moisture content of the embankment may the density and higher precise densities can be
be determined by the method preferably given in attained without precise control of water content
IS 2720 (Part 33) : 1971 or alternatively as given as in the case of fine grained soil, controlled testing
in IS 2720 (Part 28) : 1974. may not be necessary.

COMPENDIUM OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERING - PART 2 _ 147

11
spmplingof~
SECTION
IS:10442:1983
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION FOR EARTH
AUGERS (SPIRAL TYPE)
0. FOREWORD 4. CONSTRUCTION
0.1 The equipment covered in this standard is 4.1 The blade shall be either plain or toothed (see
used for piling work, soil boring and sampling Fig. 1). The edges of the blade shall be backed
works. with non-erodable welding so as to have hardness
600 to 700 HV 10 (see IS 1501 : 1968). The pilot
1. SCOPE
bit, blades, spirals and coupler shall be welded to
1.1 This standard covers dimensional and general

the shaft. The plate coupler shall be of size
requirements for earth augers (spiral type), used 100 x 75 x 8 mm except for auger sizes 550 and
in piling, soil boring and sampling works. 600, it shall be 125 x 100 x 8 mm.
2. SIZES, DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES 5. PERFORMANCE TEST
2.1 These shall be as given in Table 1, read with 5.1 The auger shall bore satisfactory a minimum
Fig. 1. The nominal size refers to the diameter depth of spiral length in a fairly consolidated soil.
bored by augers. The auger shall not be withdrawn during the test
but shall withdraw easily after it reaches the
3. MATERIALS
required depth. At the end of the test, the auger
3.0 The material for construction of various parts shall show no sign of damage, fracture or flaw.
shall be as under.
3.1 pilot Bit - It shall conform to steel 6. WORKMANSHIP
conforming to designation T 90 of Schedule VI of 6.1 The blades and pilot bits shall be free from
IS 1570 : 1961 with a maximum sulphur and cracks, seams, etc.
phosphorus content of 0.05 percent each.
7. TREATMENT
3.2 Blades - It shall conform to steel conforming
to designation T 90 of Schedule VI of IS 7.1 The auger shall be coated with one coat of red
1570 : 1961 with a maximum sulphur and oxide or anti-corrosive paint and finally painted
phosphorus content of 0.05 percent each. with blue enamel paint.
3.3 Base Plate - It shall be made of mild steel 8. MARKING

conforming to IS 513 : 1973. 8.1 - The following information shall be clearly
3.4 Spirals - It shall be made of mild steel and indelibly marked on each auger :
conforming to IS 513 : 1973. a) Name of the manufacturer or his registered
trade-mark or both,
3.5 Pipe Shaft - It shall be made of mild steel of b) Type (see 4.1) and
heavy grade as specified in IS 1239 (Part 1) : 1979. c) Date of manufacture.
3.6 Couplers - It shall be made of mild steel 8.1.1 The auger may also be marked with the
conforming to IS 513 : 1973 hardened and fS1 Certification Mark. .
tempered to produce a hardness reading within NOTE - The use of the ISI Certification Mark is governed
range 360 to 420 HV 10 (see IS 1501 : 1968). by the provisions of the Indian Standards Institution
3.7 Extension Rods - It shall be made of mild thereunder. The IS1 Mark on products covered by an Indian
steel of heavy grade as specified in IS 1239 Standard conveys the assurance that they have been produced
(Part 1) : 1979. to comply with the requirements of that standard under a
3.8 Handles and Extension to Handles - It shall which is devised and supervised by ISI and operated by the
be made of mild steel of heavy grade conforming producer. IS1 marked products are also continuously checked
to IS 1239 (Part 1) : 1979. by IS1 for conformity to that standard as a further safegurad.
COMPENDIUM OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERING - PART 2 ,. 151

I!3:10442:1!383
Details of conditions under which a licence for the use of the IS1 processors, may be obtained from the Indian Standards
Certification Mark may be granted to manufacturers 01 Institution.

NOTE - The angle of taper for blades shall be 30 + 5”.
FIG. 1 EARTH AUGER (SPIRAL TYPE)
TABLE 1 SW, DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES OF AUGER

(Chse 2.1)
NOMINAL .PILOTBm BLADES BASEPLATE SPIRALS SHAFT

--/ , rz
SIZE m
L,+: w, :; T,:; 4:: wz':, Tz-+',N, D I4 'Tf'
31 4 : T,;,, P, N2 N, L, kSD3%j L,+5D,+0.5
t: (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9) (10) 01) (12) (13) (14) (15) (16) (17) (18) (19)
mm mmmmmm mm mmmmNosmmmm mm mm mm Nos Nos mm mm mm mm
100 60 25 6 50 40.0 6 1 90 8 85 3 85+5 3 1 2% 26.9 750 26.9
150 90 40 6 85 57.5 6 1 140 8 135 3 85+5 3 1 300 33.8 700 33.8
200 115 50 8 115 77.5 8 1 185 8 150 3 llOf5 3 1 400 42.5 -600 42.5
250 115 50 8 115 102.5 8 1 235 8 230 3 llOf5 3 1 400 42.5 600 42.5
300. 115 50 8 125 127.5 8 1 285 8 280 3 110+5 3 1 400 42.5 600 42.5
375 150 100 12 150 147.5 10 2 360 10 350 4 165klO 2 1 550 76 450 42.5
400 150 100 12 150 160.0 10 2 385 10 375 4 165-+10 2 1 550 76 450 42.5
450 150 100 12 150 185.0 10 2 435 12 425 4 L65+10 2 1 550 76 450 48.4
500 150 1ilO 12 150 210.0 10 2 485 12 475 4 165210 2 1 550 76 450 48.4
550 150 loo 12 150 235 10 2 535 12 520 4 200*10 2 1 650 88.7 350 60.2
600 150 100 12 150 260 10 -2 585 12 570 4 200+10 2 1 650 88.7 350 60.2

.
IS : 10108: 1982
(Reaffirmed 1988)
Indian Standard
CODE OF PRACTICE FOR SAMPLING OF
SOILS BY THIN WALL SAMPLER WITH
STATIONARY PISTON
0. FOREWORD is kept slightly bigger than the diameter at its

0.1 Undisturbed samples of soil are required for a cutting edge. The inside clearance (C,) is defined
number of soil tests, such as unconfined as c D. - D
= -I- , where Di and D are as shown
compression test, consolidation test, permeability D
test and triaxial compression test. It has been in Fig. 1.
recognized that it is not practicable to obtain a
truely undisturbed sample, but if certain

procedures and precautions are observed, it is
possible to get relatively undisturbed samples
which may be considered sufficient keeping in view
the nature of tests to be performed on these
samples. This code deals with the method of
obtaining such samples using thin wall sampler
with stataionary piston, which are normally used
for clay and silt formation.
1. SCOPE
1.1 This standard describes the method for
obtaining undisturbed soil samples in fine grained
-?I
soils for laboratory tests using thin wall sampler
a
with stationary piston.
2. TERMINOLOGY
2.1 For the purpose of this standard, the
FIG. ~DETAILOFCUITINGEDGE
definitions given in IS 2809 : 1972 and the
following shall apply.
2.1.1 Thin Wall Sampler with Stationary 2.1.5 Angle of the Cutting Edge (a) - The
Piston - A sampler having a piston inside the thin angle made by the outer side of the cutting edge
wall sampling tube, in which during sampling, the with the centre line of the sampling tube, as shown
position of the piston remains stationary and the in Fig. 1.
sampling tube penetrates into the soil. 2.1.6 Gross Recovery Ratio - The ratio of the
2.1.2 Undisturbed Sample - The sample taken gross length of the sample obtained in the sampling
with the minimum disturbance, maintaining the tube to the length of the sampler penetrating into
structure and engineering characteristics of soil as the soil stratum being sampled.
close as possible to its conditions in-situ. 2.1.7 Effective Length of the Sampling
2.1.3 Area Ratio -The area ratio (A,) Tube - The length of the empty sampling tube,
represents the volume of soil displaced by the left after deducting from its complete length those
sampler in proportion to the volume of the soil portions which are used for fixing it with the
sample and is calculated as follows : sampler head and for accommodating the piston in
its uppermost position.
D$ - Di*
A, (precent) = x 100
D;2 3. EQUIPMENT
where D, and Di are as shown in Fig. 1. 3.1 Boring EquiPment - Any equipment capable
2.1.4 Inside Clearance - For reducing the of making a bore-hole of required depth and
friction between the soil sample and inside of the diameter, without disturbing the soil which is to be
sampler, the inside diameter of the sampling tube sampled.

IS:10108:1982
Thickness at the edge 0.2 f 0.05 mm 0.2 f 0.05 mm

Length, L 75 cm 60 cm
NOTE 1 -In the case of stiff clays or clays mixed with silt or
fine sand, if necessary, the thickness of the sampling tube may
be increased suitably with reference to Fig. 4, realizing that the
increase in are ratio will increase the degree of disturbance of
the soil sample.
NOTE 2 - The degre of distortion of the sampling tube

should be checked by measuring the maximum and minimum
STANDARD ‘A’
ROD 1 HREADS values of the outside diameter with the help of the vernier cal-
liper along the length of the tube. The difference between the
maximum and minimum values of the diameter should not ex-
ceed1.5mm.
VENTED HEAD
LOCKING CONE
AN0 SPRING

ACTUATING ROD
THIN WALL
TUBE
rc- LEATHER
WASHERS
-PISTON
i--D.-l
FIG. 2 STATIOIWARY
PISTON SAMPLER
3.2 Sampler
3.2.1 The thin wall sampler with stationary
piston consists of the sampling tube, sampler head
and piston (see Fig. 2).The sampling tube must be
connected with the sampler head tightly so as to
work as a single unit. The piston should slide
smoothly in the sampling tube maintaining 0*2,*0*05mm L 10or1°
vacuum.
ENLARGED VIEW
3.2.2 Sampling Tube - The. sampling tube AT A
shall be a cold drawn seamless pipe made of
stainless steel, brass or mild steel chrome plated
having the following dimensions (see Fig. 3). FIG.3 DIMENSIONS OF SAMPLING TUBE
Diameter at thecut- 74 f OSmm 49.5 2 0.5 mm
ting edge, D 3.2.3 Sampler Head - The sampler head is
Insidediameter, Di 75 f OSmm 50 k 0.5 mm connected tightly with a drill rod at its top and with
Thicknessforsteel 1.5 + O.lmm 1.5 + O.lmm a sampling tube at its lower end. It is installed with
Thicknessforbrass 2.0 f O.lmm 1.5 f O.lmm a locking device to allow movement of the piston
Angle of cutting 10 f 1” 10 f 1” rod in one direction only and a drain hole through
edge (=) which water is pushed away by the piston.

18
s
O*
F 16
4:
nz
14'
4:
W
2 12

6
I I I I I I
61
l-5 2*0 2.5 3-O 3.5 L-0
THICKNESS, mm
FIG. 4 VARIATION OF AREA RATIO WITH INSIDE CLEARANCE AND
THICKNESS OF THE TUBE FOR SAMPLING TUBE OF INTERNAL
DIAMETER OF 50 mm AND 75 mm
3.2.4 Piston - The piston, consisting of the sampling tube penetrates into the ground.
piston base, leather packing and piston rod, is
connected with piston extension rod to its upper
end. The piston should be equipped with a
ventilation arrangement to avoid build-up of
negative pressure while the sampler is
disconnected after sampling.
3.3 Rod
3.3.1 Drill Rod - The rod to transmit force to
push down the sampler must be of any standard
size having diameter not less than 40 mm.
3.312 Piston Extension Rod - In order to resist
downward force applied to a piston while the
sampling tube is being pushed into the ground, the
piston rod, at its end outside the sampler, is
connected to a steel member, known as piston
extension (PE) rod, which has the saine diameter
as that of the piston rod. This rod is generally of
12 mm diameter and it operates inside the hollow
drill rod. Joints in the piston extension rod are
displaced about 15 cm from joints in the drill rods.
3.4 Locking of Piston Extension Rod - The

mechanism shown in Fig. 5 or any other alternative FIG. 5 SUPPORT OF THE PISTON EXTENSION ROD
may be used to provide a fixed support to the
piston extension rod at the ground surface in order 3.5 Apparatus to Push a Sampling Tube - An
that the piston remains stationary when the apparatus having a hydraulic jack or working with

IS:10108:1982
compressed air or a mechanical jacking is required BY rotating the piston extension rod
to provide the necessary force to push a sampling counter-clockwise, the rod is threaded into the
tube, quickly and avoiding shocks, into the soil sampler head and the piston is locked at the
which is to be sampled. bottom of the sampler. The principle of this
operation is explained by a simplified diagram in
4. PROCEDURES Fig. 6 A. When the sampler reaches the bottom of
4.1 Boring and Cleaning of a Borehole - The the borehole, hold the drill rod by a rod holder to
borehole shall be made to a desired depth using a prevent sinking of the sampler.
suitable method and ensuring that the soil at the 4.2.6 Penetration of Samplcng Tube - After
bottom of the hole remains undisturbed. Casing lowering the sampler up to the desired depth in the
pipes and/or bentonite mud may be used to avoid borehole, give several clockwise turns to the piston
collapse of borehole walls. The cuttings of soil extension rod, so that the piston gets released from
from the borehole shall be removed before the sampler. Now fix the piston extension rod with
sampling. the stationary tower, as shown in Fig. 5, so that the
4.2 Sampling piston remains stationary at the level of the bottom,
of the borehole. Ensure that the tower which
4.2.1 Znspection and Maintenance of supports the piston extension rods is rigid, as any
Sampler - The sampler shall be thoroughly downward movement of the piston at the time of
inspected before use with particular reference to penetration of the sampling tube will cause

loosening of components, functioning of piston over-compression of the soil sample. Next, by an
rod lock device and distortion of sampling tubes. apparatus mentioned in 3.5, push the sampling
The damaged parts shall be repaired or replaced tube into the soil for a length which is at least 90
before using the sampler. The outside diameter of percent of the effective sampling length of the
the sampling tube shall be measured at tube, as explained in 2.1.7. The prihciple of this
cross-sections at distances of 30,40 and 80 cm from operation is explained by a simplified diagram in
the edge of the tube. The maximum and minimum Fig. 6B. The sampler should be made to penetrate
inside diameters of the tube shall also be checked. quickly by a. continuous action without giving
4.2.2 Assembling of Sampler - In assembling shock to it.’ The rate of penetration should be
the sampler, close the ventilation arrangement of preferably .lO to 15 cm per second. In case the
the piston, and check if the backward and forward penetration has to be stopped midway, record its
movements of the piston inside the sampling tube depth. In case the soil becomes stiffer midway of-
are without obstruction. Connect it to the sampler penetration and the sampler cannot be pushed any
head tightly using screws. The assembled sampler more, do not push it by force but terminate
shall be stored properly so as to protect the edge of sampling at that depth and record the same.
the sampling tube against damage. Measure the sampling length which is equal to
4.2.3 The depth of the bottom of the casing, if the extent of displacement of the drill rod with
used below ground level, and water level in the respect to the bench mark on the drill rig.
borehole shall be noted. 4.2.6.1 The following precautions during
4.2.4 Sampling shall be done as soon as possible penetration of the sampling tubes may also be
after the clean-out operation and shall not be done taken :
after an interval, for example, where a borehole a) There must not be any rotation of the
has been cleaned out and left overnight. sampling tube during downward movement
and penetration.
4.2.5 Lowering of the Sampler - While
lowering the sampler into the borehole, the piston b) The total penetration should not exceed the
is kept at its lowest point thus closing the lower end net length of the sampler.
of the sampler and preventing the entry of any 4.2.7 Lifting the Sampler - The sampler
foreign matter into the sampler. The conical ball should be torn at its bottom by giving rotation
bearing catch, termed as piston rod lock in Fig. 2, before lifting it out, taking sufficient care not to
prevents the piston rod from slipping downward give any shock to the sampler. After completion of
with respect to the head of the sampler. To prevent the driving it is advisable to wait for 10 to 20
upward movement of the piston as the sampler is minutes before starting the actual separation and
lowered into the borehole, the piston rod has a withdrawal operation in order to allow full
short section of left-handed threads which engages development of adhesion and friction between the
a matching section of threads in the sampler head. sample and the sampling tube.
l!% COMPENDIUM OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERING - PART 2

: 1982
** .“C rSTA7lC FORCETO
SAMPLER Bi PISTON
ROD LOCK
-PISTON IN
STATIONARY
POSITION

6 A During Towering of Sampler 6 6 During Penetrating the Tube in soil
FIG. 6 SIMPLIFIED DIAGRAM EXPLAINING PRINCIPLE OF OPERATION OF

PISTON SAMPLER WITH STATIONARY PISTON
4.2.8 Disembarkment of the Sampler - The SAMPLING TUBE

sampler shall be disconnected after confirming
whether the soil sample is secured or partly drop-
ped out. Before extracting the piston from the
sampling tube, loosen the ventilation arrange-
ment in the piston, and be careful not to deform
the tube or to give shock to the sample.
NOTE1 -In very loose sand and silty soil below water table,
provision of core catcher made of spring leaves at the cutting
edge of the sampler, may be necessary to avoid loss of sample
while lifting it’(see Fig. 7).
NOTE 2 - For minimising the disturbances further, the thin

wall piston sampler should be operated hydraulically, for
which the kit may be modified to suit the principle of operation
explained in Fig. 8. It confers two advantages, namely, (a)
needs only one set of rods, that is, ordinary drill rods, and (b)
at full stroke, a hole in the position rod releases the soil pressure
and avoids overdriving.
4.2.9 Samples shall be taken by repeating the

FIG. 7 FIXING CORE CATCHER ON THE INSIDE OF
sampling procedures at every change in stratum or
THE CUT-~ING EDGE OF THE SAMPLER
at intervals not more than 1.5 m, whichever is less.
Samples may be taken at lesser intevals if specified
encountered, should be recorded on the field logs.
or found ‘necessary; when in between vane shear
Particular mention should be made if these
test is conducted the interval be increased to 3 m.
occurred at the time of sampling. Water levels
4.3 Field Observations - Water table infprmat- before and after insertion of the casing, where
ion, including ground water level, elevations at used, should be measured. In sandy soils, the level
which the drilling water was lost, or elevations at should be determined as the casing is pulled and
which water under excess pressure was then measured at least 30 minutes after the casing
COMPENDIUM OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERING - PART 2 I57

IS:lOlO8:1982
. ..
BALL CHECK ‘:‘. *.:
. .. * .,.
I‘._.
*. . .
. . .
.-
-. .
* .
AIR VENT *, .
8’. .
- :.
WATER UNDE *. l
PRESSURE -...
‘\.‘L
.. .
..-
.:
WATER RETURN ,. , ‘*1
CIRCUL .ATION- * . ‘,
* *a.
..:
‘- .
. .
PISTON ROD ‘2
: *‘.
.*
‘. -
. .

* -.
* -.
- . .
. *-
.- *
. .
. ‘r
\ _. .
. . ..
‘?
’ *
.I
8 A Sampkr is Set in 8B Penetration Sampler Tube 8C Pressure is Released Through

Drilled Hole into Soil Hole in Piston Rod
FIG. 8 DIAGRAMATICSKETCH OF HYDRAULICALLYOPERATED PISTON ROD
is pulled ; in silty soils at least 24 hours after the the sample, remove them and record it.
casing is pulled; in clays no accurate water level 4.4.3 After reaming the soil at both ends of the
determination is possible unless pervious seams tube up to the required extent, seal the ends of the
are present. However, the 24 hours level should sample with paraffin wax, etc, in order to prevent
also be recorded for clays. When drilling mud is expansion or displacement of the sample or
used and the water level is desired, casing evaporation of moisture. Any wax that does not
perforated at the lower end shall be lowered into have appreciable shrinkage or does not permit
the hole and the hole bailed down until all traces of evaporation of water from the sample shall be
drilling mud are removed from inside the casing. used. Micro-crystalline wax, if available, may be
Ground water levels shall be determined after used in preference to paraffin wax. A mixture of
bailing at time intervals of 30 minutes and 24 paraffin wax and bees wax in the proportion 4: 1
hours. has also been found to be suitable. Thin discs of
4.4 Preparation for Shipment steel or brass that are slightly smaller than inside
diameter of the tube are desirable for plugging
4.4.1 Upon removal of the sampling tube, both ends. before sealing with wax. Suitable
measure the length of the sample obtained in the expanding packers may also be used.
sampling tube and from the knowledge of the
depth of penetration of the sampler, calculate and The thickness of sealing shall not be less than
record the gross recovery ratio as given in 2.1.6. 1 cm at the lower end of the sampler and not less
than 3 cm at its top end.
For a sample acceptable as undisturbed, the gross
recovery ratio shall not be less than 95 percent. 4.4.4 Record the following on the outside of the
4.4.2 Observe both ends of the sampler. If there sampling tube :
are some soil fragments sedimented on the top of a) Name of the project,
158 OF INDIAN
COMPENDIUM STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERING - PART 2
IS:10108:1982
b) Number of boring and that of sample, portions of the sample so as to select an

c> Depth of sampling, appropriate part of the sample which will suit the
4 Date of sampling, . permissible degree of disturbance of sample for
e) Top and/or bottom end of the sample. the desired test.
These particulars may preferably be given on 5. REPORT
a table indicated in IS 1892 : 1980.
5.1 All data obtained during the boring and
4.4.5 When samples are temporarily stored at
sampling operations shall be recorded in the field
the work site, be careful not to subject them to
and shall include the following :
serious change of temperature, as by direct
exposure to sun. 4 Job identification;
4.5 Transportation
b) Date of boring - start, finish;
cl Boring number and co-ordinates, if
4.5.1 Sufficient care should be taken not to give available;
impact or serious change of temperature to the 4 Surface elevation, if available;
samples during transportation. e) Drilling method;
4.5.2 When the samples are being stored in the f ) Sample number and depth;
g> Method of advancing sampler, penetration

laboratory, confirm sufficient sealing on both ends
and recovery ratio, and pressure required
of the samples and then place them in appropriate
for pushing the sampler, if available;
lots confirming the particulars recorded on the
sampling tube. Store the samples in a dark and h) Type and size of sampler;
j) Depth to water surface, to loss of water, to
humid room.
artesian head, and times at which readings
4.6 Extraction of Sample were made;
k) Size of casing, depth of cased hole; -
4.6.1 The sample should be extracted in a
m) Description of soil based examination of
humid room shaded from the sunshine. Remove
the seal at both the ends and extrude the sample by soil removed from the ends of tubes;
n) Thickness of layer;
a suitable extruder continuously, so that there is
p) Weather conditions; and
minimum disturbance to the sample. Also, avoid
q) Other observations and remarks.
any cause of bending or breakage of the sample by
its own weight. These observations shall be recorded in a
4.6.2 Examine the extruded sample very closely suitable proforma. A recommended proforma is
and locate the relatively disturbed and undisturbed given in Appendix A of IS 2132 : 1972.

IS:8763: 1978
(Reaffirmed 1987)
Indian Standard
GUIDE FOR UNDISTURBED
SAMPLING OF SANDS
0.1 Undisturbed sampling of soil is a commoti 1.1 This standard covers the following two
feature in the field of soil mechanics and techniques of undisturbed sampling in
foundation engineering for finding in-situ uncemented sands :
characteristics of soils. In nature soils are found in a) Stationary piston sampling with drilling
variety and in different states of compactness and fluid circulation technique, and
samplers have been designed to collect soils with b) Compressed air technique.
least disturbance within practical limitations.
Cohesionless soils are still problematic as far as 2. STATIONARY PISTON SAMPLING WITH
undisturbed samling is concerned, and hence in DRILLING FLUID CIRCULATION

situ testing is more common for these soils. TECHNIQUE
Samples of coarse or loose sand readily fall out 2.1 Equipment - Figure 1 illustrates the various
when ordinary sampling equipment with an open components of equipment apart from drilling
end is used. This guide has, therefore, been quipment and pump. There are as follows :
prepared to provide guidance in obtaining
undisturbed samples in sand and covers two a) A thin walled sampler conforming to IS
important techniques of undisturbed sampling in 2132 : 1972.
uncemented sands, namely, stationary piston b) An airtight piston with a vacuum breaking
sampling with drilling fluid circulation technique arrangement.
and compressed air technique. However, even c) The sampler head comprising the
with these methods the sample obtained may be following :
considered to be only relatively undisturbed. 1) Suitable set screws to join the sampling
These samples are generally used for the tube to the head of the sampler,
determination of in-situ density. It also briefly 2) A vent hole, and
mentions the technique of rotary core drilling in 3) A clamping arrangement to prevent the
cemented sands. piston rod from falling down during
lowering or withdrawal.
0.2 Special techniques in sampling of sand have
d) Sturdy and straight piston rods with 1 m
not been covered in this guide as these techniques
joint to joint spacing.-
are costly and are employed on a limited scale in
very special cases. Some of such techniques in use e) A storage tank wherein drilling fluid
are mentioned in 0.2.1. (generally bentonite slurry) of required
consistency is kept constantly agitated by
0.2.1 Freezing or impregnation form special paddle or any other suitable arrangement.
techniques beneficially used in sampling sands
f 1 A tank to receive the efficient (drilling
under favourable conditions. Freezing ensures fluid) to separate the sand particles from
solidification of the lower part of the samile to the drilling fluid to allow for recirculation
retain it in the sampler tube Solidification can also of the latter.
be achieved in some cases by impregnating a
chemical such as kerosene at subzero temperature 2.2 Description of Technique and Procedure of
in place of drilling fluid, mixing alchohol with dry Sampling .
ice, emulsified asphalt and grout, etc.
2.2.1 Generul - In this method, partial
0.3 In the form’ulation of this standard due vacuum is c&ted above the sample while
weightage has been given to international withdrawing the stationary piston sampler. The
co-ordination among the standards and practices coating of drilling fluid at the shoe keeps the sand
prevailing in different countries in addition to sample intact during withdrawal. Since the piston
relating it to the practices in this field in this will be at the shoe of the sampler at the beginning
country. of the sampling operation, no shavings can enter

.
IS:8763:1978
PISTON ROD
- GROUND
PISTON ROD
___..
VACUUM
BREAKER ROD

ROD CLAMP
SAMPLE
DRILLING t&JO
SAMPLING TUBE
CAVITY FILLED
BY FLOW OF
SURROUNDING
SAMPLE\
1A Start of Drive 1B End of Drive 1C During Withdrawal

FIG.~ CROSSSECTION~DIAGRAMATIC~THR~IJGHBORINGDURINGSAMPLERDRIVEAND WXHDRAWAI
the tube during samphng. The consistency of the 2.2.2.3 The outcoming fluid shall be collected
drilling fluid shall depend on the grain size of in a separate tank and the sand particles allowed to
sands, the relative density, and the position and settle down. The supernatant fluid shall then be
condition of water table. For fine sand, a drilling used for recirculation.
fluid with a specific gravity of 1.05 will be
satisfactory. 2.2.3 Sampling Technique
2.2.2 Procedure of Sampling 2.2.3.1 Having advanced the drill hole, the
2.2.2.1 The bore hole shall be advanced with sampler with the rod in extended position, shall be
any suitable technique. It is preferable to use towered. The drill rods and the piston rods help
rotary drilling in combination with drilling fluid reaching down to the surface of contact where
for advancement of oore hole; particularly, for sampling is to be done. The piston rod shall be
deeper depths which limits the lengths of casing to clamped to the drilling machine or tripod and the
the upper depths. sampling tube shall be pushed continuously into
the virgin soil.
2.2.2.2 In case of rotary drilling using drilling
fluid, the drilling fluid of required consistency shall 2.2.3.2 Before withdrawal of the sample, it
be kept continuously agitated in a tank by paddle shall be given a rotary motion to shear the sample
. or any other arrangement. This fluid shall be at the bottom of the tube. The piston shall be
circulated through a drill rod during drilling locked so that it does not move downwards while
operation. It is advantageous to use fish tail bit for the sample is being cut. Both the drill rods and the
such drilling. piston rods shall be removed in stages.

IS:8763 :1978
2.2.3.3 Necessary precaution shall be taken

to prevent the piston or piston rod from falling
down. This shall be ensured by a suitable piston
rod locking device such as a conical catch, which
shall be checked to be in satisfactory working
conditon prior to use.
3. COMPRESSED AIR TECHNIQUE
3.1 Equipment - The equipment is shown in
Fig. 2. It shall have the following components
apart from the drilling equipment and casing pipes
(152 mm diameter)
a) Compressed air bell to house the sampler
tube connected through a hose to a foot
pump at the ground surface.
b) Sampler tube (63 mm diameter and 1.7
mm wall thickness).

c) A special head comprising the following:
1) Set screws to connect the sampler head
to sampling tube,
2) Rubber sealing rings,
3) Water exit ports,
4) A rubber diaphragm valve,
5) A relief valve,
6) A bronze bushing,
7) Special sealing ring (Angus type), and
8) A steel head for the bell.
d) A removable spacer block.
e) Guide rod.
f) A socket block encasing guide rod along
with a shackle to push the sampler tube.
g) Lifting cable.
3.2 Description of Technique and Procedure of FIG. 2 GENERAL LAYOUT OF SAND SAMPLERWITH
Sampling AUXILIARY BELL FOR COMPRESSEDAIR
3.2.1 General - In this technique compressed

overdriving.
air is used to keep the ground water separated
from the sample in order to avoid dispersion of 3.2.2.3 The drill rod shall then be withdrawn.
sampled sand. This is done by withdrawing after Compressed air shall be forced into the bell by
sampling, the sampler tube into a bell where the means of a foot pump. The air in turn pushes the
ground water has been displaced by compressed diaphragm of the relief valve so as to maintain an
air through a continuous pumping process. The excess pressure of 140 kN/m* (1.4 kgf/cm*) thus
depth of water in the drill holes govern the closing the diaphragm check valve.
pressure of compressed air. The method is suitable 3.2.2.4 Having expelled the water in the bell,
for sampling sand under water table. as indicated by the rising air bubbles, the sampler
shall be withdrawn into the bell and the entire
3.2.2 Procedure of Sampling
assembly raised to the surface by means of a cable.
3.2.2.1 The drill hole shall be advanced with During raising of the assembly to the surface:
a suitable boring method using 152 mm diameter water should be poured continuously to keep the
casing down to the depth of sampling. drill hole full. The foot pump shall be continuously
3.2.2.2 Having reached the required depth, operated during withdrawal.
the sampler shall be pushed into soil by means of a 3.2.2.5 The spacer block above the bell shall
drill rod and the spacer block and shackle then be removed so that the sampler is pushed out
arrangement. The spacer block above the bell of the bell and sampling tube disconnected. A
limits the length of sampling stroke, thus, avoiding filter plug shall be placed in the lower end The

IS:8763:1978
suction created by check valve shall then be cave in double tube core barrels may be used. If
released and undisturbed sample obtained. such cemented sands exist at shallow depths,
preferably block samples may be obtained, by
4. SAMPLING IN CEMENTED SANDS isolating a 200-300 mm square column of soil
followed by covering it by a slightly larger hollow
4.1 Slow rotary technique using core barrels may box open at top and bottom. The annular space
be used to obtain undisturbed cores in cemented between the rock and box shall then be filled by
sand. If necessary, drilling fluid may be used paraffin. The sample shall be trimmed by a spade
during advancement for stabilization of the hole. and then covered at top and bottom also by
In certain cases, where drilling is susceptible to paraffin so as to preserve its moisture.


IS:11594:1985
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION FOR MILD STEEL
THIN WALLED SAMPLING TUBES AND
SAMPLER HEADS
0. FOREWORD given in Fig. 1. The length shall be as desired.

0.1 The Indian Standards Institution has already NOTE-The cutting shoes have been so designed that these
published a series of standards on methods of give area ratio within 10 percent, and inside clearance 1 to 3
percent.
testing soils. It has been recognised that reliable
and comparable tests results can be obtained only
with standard testing equipment capable of giving
the desired level of accuracy. A series of Indian
Standards covering specification of equipment
used for testing soils are being formulated so as to

encourage its development and manufacture in the
country.
0.2 The equipment covered in this standard is
used for carrying out undisturbed sampling of soils
covered in IS 2132 : 1985.
0.3 For the purpose of deciding whether a
particular requirement of this standard is complied
with, the final value, observed or calculated,
expressing the result of a test or analysis, shal! be
rounded off in accordance with IS 2 : 1960. The
number of significant places retained in the
rounded off value should be the same as that of the
specified value in this standard.
1. SCOPE A I ,‘T’ THREAD
1.1 This standard covers requirements of thin wall
sampling tubes and sampler heads for in-situ
sampling of soils, as required for open drive tube
samplers.
2. TERMINOLOGY 1 ~IbHOE
2.1 For the purpose of this standard, definitions

given in IS 2809 : 1972 shall apply.
3. MATERIALS
3.1 Material for the construction of sampling
tubes shall be as given in Table 1. Size 40 65 80 loo
Thread size (T, M45x3 M75x3 M85x3MllOx3
4. DIMENSIONS Outermost dia of
the shoes and
4.1 There shall be 4 sizes, 40,65, 80 and 100 mm sampler head (0,) SO 77 94 11.5
based on internal diameter of the tube. The Nominal dia of tube (0,) 40 65 80 100
tolerance on all dimensions shall be f 0.5 mm. Outer dia of shoes (D,,,) 41 66 82 103
Internal dia of shoes (4) 39 64 78 9s
5. CONSTRUCTION Alldimensions in millimctrcs
5.1 The sampling tubes, cutting shoes and F1c.1 DETAILSOF~AMPLING TUBE WITHDRIVINO
sampling heads shall be made according to details HEAD AND SHOE
164 COMPENDIUM OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERING - PART I

IS :11594:1985
equipment :
TABLE 1 MATERIALS OF CONSTRUCTIqN FOR a) The name of the manufacturer or his
DIFFERENT PARTS OF THE SAMPLING TUBES registered trade-mark or both, and
(Clause 3.1)
b) Size and length.
PART MATERIAL SPECIAL CONFORMINGTO 6.1.1 The equipment (each part) may also be
REQUIREMENT INDIANSTANDARD marked with the ISI Certification Mark.
Tube Mild steel Smooth surface Grade light of IS NOTE - The use of the IS1 Certification Mark is governed
1239(Partl):l979 by the provisions of the Indian Standards Institution
Cutting Mild steel 45-50 HRC Is 4432 : 1967 (Certification Marks) Act, and the Rules and Regulations
shoes case with smooth made thereunder. The ISI Mark on products covered by an
hardened surface Indian Standard conveys the assurance that they have been
Sampling Mild steel IS 226 : 1975 produced to comply with the requirements of that standard
head under a well-defined system of inspection, testing and quality
control which is devised and supervised by IS1 and operated by
the producer. IS1 marked products are also continuously
checked by ISI for conformity to that standard as a further
4. MARKING safeguard. Details of conditions, under which a licence for the
use of the IS1 Certification Mark may be granted to
6.1 The following information shall be clearly and manufacturer or processors, may be obtained from the Indian
indelibly marked on each component of the Standards Institution.


IS : 2132 : 19%
Indian Standard
THIN-WALLED TUBE SAMPLING OF SOILS
(Second
Revision)
0. FOREWORD NOTE - Where casing is used, the equipment shall be

capable of driving and removing the casing and shall include a
0.1 Undisturbed samples of soil are required for a pressure pump for clean-out operations. Where drilling fluid is
number of soil test such as unconfined used, a suitable mud pump is required. Where augers are used
compression test, consolidation test, permeability for clean-out purposes no special equipment other than that for
test and triaxial compression test. It has been sampling is generally requried. The hole may be cleaned with a

bailer with a flap valve but this should not be used in sandy soils.
recognized that it is not practicable to obtain a
truly undistrubed sample but if certain procedures 3.2 Sampler Head - It shall conform to IS
and precautions are observed it is possible to get 11594 : 1985.
relatively undisturbed samples which may be
considered sufficient keeping in view the nature of 3.3 Thin-Walled Tubes - It shali conform to IS
tests to be performed on these samples: This code 11594 : 1985. These may be of stainless steel and
deals with the method of obtaining such samples copper.
using thin walled tube samplers with sampler heads 3.4 Sealing Material - Any wax that does not
(with and without check valves). have appreciable shrinkage or does not permit
0.1.1 This standard was first published in 1963 evaporation of water from the sample shall be
and revised in 1972. In this revision, requirements permitted. A mixture of paraffin wax and bees
regarding specifications for sampling tubes have wax in the proportion 4 : 1 has also been found to
been reviewed based on indigenous availability be suitable.
taking into consideration the general practice in 3.5 Miscllaneous Items - Labels, data sheets,
the country, the sampling. tubes have been shipping containers, etc.
restricted to four sizes only. The detail
specification of sampling tubes and sampler head 4. PROCEDURE
are covered i&parate Indian Standard. 4.1 Driving the Casing - Where casing is used it
0.2 In very loose saturated sandy and silty soils shall not be driven below the sampling level, and
and clays the use of a piston sampler may often be casing pipe should be in such a way that it does not
necessary to secure a suitable undisturbed sample, disturb the soil to be sampled.
;he details of which are covered in IS 10108 : 1982. 4.2 Cleaning the. Hole
1. SCOPE 4.2.1 The hole shall be cleaned to sampling
j 1.1 This standard describes the method for elevation using whatever method is preferred that
obtaining relatively undisturbed cohesive and will ensure that the soil to be sampled is not
C - 0 soil samples suitable for laboratory tests, disturbed. In saturated sandy and silty soils the
using a thinwalled metal tube. drilling equipment should be withdrawn slowly to
prevent loosening of the soil around the hole.
2. TERMINOLOGY
4.2.2 Where casing is used, the hole shall be
2.1 For the purpose of this standard, the cleaned out to the bottom or just below the casing.
definitions given in IS 2809 1972 shall apply. A clean-out auger should be used to clean the
3. EQUIPMENT bottom of the hole, when necessary.
3.1 Drilling Equipment - The equipment used 4.2.3 Bottom discharge bits shall not be
shall provide a reasonably clean hole before permitted for clean-out purposes; side or @ward
insertion of the thin-walled tube, shall not disturb discharge bits may be permitted.
the suil to be sampled, and shall effect a rapid 4.2.4 The water level in the hole should be
penetration of the tube into the soil to be sampled. maintained at or above the ground water level,

IS:2132:1986
especially in soils that might be disturbed by the length of the sample m the tube and the length
flow of ground water into the drill hole such as between the top of the tube and the top of the
sandy and silty soils. sample in the tube shall be measured and
recorded,
4.3 Obtaining Soil Sample
4.4.2 The disturbed material in the upper end
4.3.1 The depth of bottom of the casing, if used,
of the tube shall be completely removed before
below ground level and the water level in the bore
applying wax for sealing. The length and type of
hole should be noted.
the sample so removed should be recorded.
4.3.2 Sampling shall be done as soon as possible
4.4.3 The soil at the lower end of the tube shall
after the clean-out operation and shall not be done be reamed to a distance of about 20 mm. After
after an interval, for example, where a hole has cleaning both ends shall be sealed with wax applied
been cleaned-out and left overnight. in a way that will prevent wax from entering the
4.3.3 The assembled sampling tube should be sample. Wax used for sealing should not be heated
lowered to the bottom of the hole, and the to more than a few degrees above its melting
following information should be noted: temperature. The empty space in the samplers, if
a) Depth of bottom of bore hole below ground any, should be filled with moist soil, saw dust etc,

!evel ; and the ends covered with tight fitting caps.
b) Amount of penetration of the sampling 4.4.4 If it becomes necessary to keep the
tube into the soil, under the combined samples at the site for some time, they shall be
weight of the tube and the rods; and kept in the shade. They should be kept o.ver a bed
c) Water level in the bore hole. of sand, jute bags, saw dust, etc, and covered over
on top with similar material (sand, jute bags, saw
4.3.4 The sampling tube shall then be pushed
dust, etc). The bed and top cover should be kept
into the soil by a continuous and rapid motion. In
moist. Such bedding and top cover may also be
no case the tube shall be pushed farther than the
provided at the time of shipment of the samplers
length provided for the sample. About 50 mm
with samples (see 4.4.3).
shall be allowed for cuttings and sludge. A
clearance of 10 to 20 mm shall be allowed below
4.5 Lahelling and Shipping
the sampled head in the tube. The depth of
penetration of the tube shall also be noted. Before 4.51 Labels giving the following information
pulling out the tube, at least 5 minutes shall be should be affixed to the tubes :
allowed to elapse after pushing the tube after a) Tube number,
which the tube shall be turned at least for two b) Job designation,
revolutions to shear the sample off at the bottom. c) Sample location,
NOTE - In case the equipment used for SF’T is also used for d) Boring number,
driving the sampling tube, then the length of penetration shall e) Sample number,
be limited to 50 blows.
f) Depth,
4.3.5 Samples shall be taken, by repeating the g) Penetration, and
sampling procedures, at every change in stratum h) Gross recovery ratio.
or at intervals not more than 1.5 m, whichever is
less. Samples may be taken at lesser intervals if 4.5.1.1 The tube and boring numbers should
specified or found necessary. The intervals be be,marked in duplicate.
increased to 3 m if in between vane shear test or
SPT is performed. 4.5.2 Duplicate markings of the boring number
4.3.6 Field Observations - Water-table and sample number on a sheet which will not be
information including ground water level, affected by moisture should be enclosed inside the
elevations at which the drilling water was lost, or tube.
deviation at which water under excess pressure
was encountered should be recorded on the field 5. REPORT
logs.
5.1 All data obtained during the boring and
4.4 Preparation for Shipment sampling operations shall be recorded in the field
4.4.1 Upon removal of the sampling tube, the as per details given in Appendix A.
.
IS : 2132 : 1986
APPENDIX A
(Clause 5.1)
PROFClRMA FOR RECORD OF OBSERVATIONS DURING
UNDISTURBED SAMPLING OF SOILS USING THIN-WALLED TUBE SAMPLES (see Note)
Name of Project :
a) Drilling Details OR b) Trial Pit
Bore hole No. and coordinates: Location:
Drilling method: Dimensions:
Surface elevation at Elevation at top
bore hole top: dimensions
Date of boring : Start Finish
Details of casing, if used :
Name of driller :

c) Observations of Water Levels in the Bore Holes
1) Ground water level
2) Elevations at which drilling water was lost with the related to sampling
3) Elevations at which water under excess pressure was encountered with time related to sampling
4) Water level before insertion of casing if used
5) Water level after insertion of casing if used
6) Water level after pulling out of casing if used and possible
7) Whether drilling mud was used
d) Sampling Operations
1) Sampling tube No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2) Sample No.
3) Method used for cleaning bottom of hole with date and time
4) Depth to bottom of casing below ground level
5) Date and time of sampling
6) Sampling details :
i) Total lengths, L,
ii) Size
7) Level of water maintained in the bore hole
8) Depth to bottom of cleaned bore hole below GL
9) Level of water in the hole at the time of sampling
10) Amount of penetration of the tube under its weight and weight of rods
11) Method used for pushing the tube
12) Depth of penetration of the tube
13) Distance between top of tube and top of sample (measured after withdrawal), L,
14) Whether soil sample in the tube was up to the cutting edge of the tube after withdrawal, if not
how much within
15) Any evidence of slipping of the soil sample in the tube at the time of withdrawal
16) Thickness of soil sample removed from the cutting edge (bottom) end of the tube
17) Any disturbed material removed from the top end of the tube
18) Length of soil sample left in the tube
19) Weight of tube with soil sample left in the tube
20) Field description of soil, from soil removed from the ends of the tube (composition, condition,
colour, structure, consistency, etc)
21) Remarks and special observations, if any
NOTE - This profc,rma has been made comprehensive to include all observations indicated in the code. The proforma may be
modified to suit individual ,‘ b conditons. Some of the items indicated in the proforma may not be needed when sampling from a open
trial pit. In such a case the direc /L cf sampling, horizontal or vertical should also be indicated.
168 COMPENDIUM OF INDIAN STANDARDS Oh’ SOIL ENGINEERING - PART 2

SECTION 12
soil Product
,
IS : 1725 : 1982
(Reaffirmed 1988)
ZndianStandard
SPECIFICATION FOR
SOIL BASED BLOCKS
USED GENERAL BUILDING CONSTRUCTION
(First Revision)
0. FOREWORD follows :
0.1 Development during the last two decades in Length Breadth Height
the use of soil based blocks in different parts of the cm cm cm
world and the experience which has been gained 19 9 9
for nearly a decaae in the field of construction in 19 9 4
India hold out a great promise for the use of soil 29 19 9

based blocks in general building construction,
particularly in low-cost structures. Experience 4.2 The dimensions shall be tested in accordance
shows that \ most soils can be satisfactorily with the procedure given in 4.2.1 and shall be
stabilized with cement-lime. It is, however, within following limits per twenty blocks.
necessary to conduct comprehensive tests on soils
in a laboratory in order to determine the optimum Block Size Length Breadth Height
requirements to give the specified properties. cm cm cm cm
While in general building construction soil based 19 x 9x 9 372 to388 174to 186 174to 186
blocks may be used as a substitute for bricks, their 19 x 9x 4 372 to388 174 to 186 74to 86
use should be avoided in the case of isolated load 29 x19x9 570to590 372to388 174to186
bearing columns, piers and such other heavily
loaded structures.
4.2.1 Twenty (more according to the size of
0.1.1 This standard was first published in 1960. stack) whole blocks shall be selected at random
Based on further studies conducted, this revision from the sample selected under 6. All blisters,
has been prepared. The principal modification is loose particles of clay and small projections shall
in respect of weathering test, which has been be removed. They shall then be arranged upon a
prescribed as per studies conducted at Indian level surface successively in contact with each
Institute of Science, Bangalore. The revision now other and in a straight line. The overall length of
covers all types of soil based blocks. the assembled blocks shall be measured with a
steel tape or other suitable inextensible measures
1. SCOPE
sufficiently long to measure the whole row at one
1.1 This standard covers the requirements and test stretch. Measurement by repeated application of
for soil based blocks for use in general building short rule or measure shall not be permitted. If,
construction. for any reason, it is found impracticable ta
measure blocks in one row, the sample may be
2. GENERAL
divided into rows of 10 blocks each, which shall be
2.1 Soil based blocks shall be manufactured from measured separately to the nearest millimetre. All
a mixture of suitable soil and ordinarily Portland these dimensions shall be added together.
cement or lime Pozzolana mixture thoroughly
mixed together, preferably in a mechanical mixer. 4.3 Each block shall also have a frog one
The mixture is moulded and cast into blocks. centimetre deep and 10 x 4 cm on one of its flat
sides.
3. CLASSIFICA’l ION . 5. PHYSICAL REQUIREMENTS
3.1 The blocks shall be of two classes, Class 20
and Class 30 (see 5.1). 5.1 Compressive Strength - The blocks when
tested in accordance with the procedure laid down
4. SIZES in IS 3495 (Part 1) : 1976 shall have a minimum
4.1 There shall be three sizes of soil-cement average compressive strength of not less than 20
blocks, the dimensions of which shall be as kgf/cm2 for Class 20 and 30 kgf/cm* for Class 30.

IS:1725:1982
51.1 The compressive strength of any procedure laid down in IS 5454 : 1978.
individual block shall not fall below the minimum
7. MARKING
average compressive strength by more than 20
percent. 7.1 Each block shall be marked in the frog with
the manufacturer’s identification mark or initials.
5.2 Water Absorption - The block when tested
in accordance with the procedure laid down in 7.1.1 The manufacturers may also use the IS1
IS 3495 (Part 2) : 1976, after immersion in cold Certification Mark.
water for 24 hours, an average water absorption NOTE - The use of the ISI Certification Mark is governed
by the provisions of the Indian Standards !n+tution
shall not be more than 15 percent by weight.
5.3 Weathering - When tested in accordance thereunder. The IS1 Mark on products covered by an Indian
with Appendix A, the maximum loss of weight Standard conveys the assurance that they have been produced
shall not exceed 5 percent.
which is devised and supervised by IS1 and operated by the
6. SAMPLING AND CRITERIA FOR producer. IS1 marked products are also continuously checked
CONFORMITY by IS1 for conformity to that standard as a further safeguard.
Details of conditions under which alicence for the use of the IS1
Certification Mark may be granted to manufacturers or
6.1 .Sampling and criteria for conformity of the processors, may be obtained from the Indian Standards

blocks shall be done in accordance with the Institution.
APPENDIX A
(Clause 5.3)
WEATHERING TEST
A-l. PRINCIPLE with 36 holes of 2 mm diameter. A facility for

A-l.1 The parameters that need be simulated in providing a device pump to create a constant
the weathering test are the (i) rain drop diameter pressure of 1.5 + 0.2 kgf/cm” should be available
at impact (range in 2 mm for medium intensity and for this test.
4 mm for high intensity), (ii) maximum terminal A-4. PROCEDURE
velocity of 6.5 m/s at impact, and (iii) maximum
intensity of rainfall, 15-30 mm/h. A-4.1 The block to be tested is to be mounted on
a test rig, such that only one face is exposed to
A-2. TEST SPECIMENS shower and discharged water should find an exit
A-2.1 Three whole blocks shall be selected from without wetting the other faces or getting collected
the sample of blocks produced after carrying out such that blocks get immersed. These showers are
the test for dimensional conformity. These blocks placed at a distance of 18 cm from the block and
shall be designated as specimen A, B and C are arranged by the side, such that the complete
respectively. face gets exposed. The period of exposure is
limited to 2 hours and then the exposed surfaces
A-3. SPRAY TEST are examined for possible pitting. The tests are
A-3.1 A set of spray non-rustable showers that carried out on at least 3 blocks. The limiting
can produce a hard spray all over the block should diameter of the pit formed is to be within 1 cm for
be used. The diameter of each shower is 10 cm passing this weathering test.

ANNEX A
LIST OF REFERRED INDIAN STANDARDS
IS 2 : 1960 Rules for rounding off numerical values (revised)

IS 226 : 1975 Structural steel (standard quality) (fifth revision)
IS 407 : 1981 Brass tubes for general purposes (third revision)
IS 460 Test sieves
(Part 1) : 1985 Wire cloth test sieves (third revision)
(Part 2) : 1985 Perforated plate test sieves (third revision)
IS 513 : 1986 Cold rolled low carbon steel sheets and strips (third revision)
IS 1239 (Part 1) : 1979 Mild steel tubes, tubulars and other wrought steel fittings: Part 1 Mild
steel tubes (fourth revision)
IS 1433 : 1965 Beam scales (revised)
IS 1434 : 1959 Counter machines
IS 1501 (Part 1) : 1984 Method for Vickers hardness test for metallic materials : Part 1
HV 5 to HV 100 (second revision)

IS 1570 : 1961 Schedules for wrought steels for general engineering purposes
IS 1875 : 1978 Carbon steel billets, blooms, slabs and bars for forgings
(fourth revision)
IS 1888 : 1982 Method of load test on soils (second revision)
IS 1892 : 1979 Code of practice for subsurface investigation for foundations
(first revision)
IS 1904 : 1986 Code of practice for design and construction of foundations in soils :
General requirements (third revision)
IS 2102 (Part 1) : 1980 General tolerances for dimensions and form and position : Part 1
General tolerances for linear and angular dimensions (second revision)
IS 2131 : 1981 Method for standard penetration test for soils (first revision)
IS 2132 : 1986 Code of practice for thin-walled tube sampling of soils (second revision)
IS 2720 Methods of tests for soils
(Part 1) : 1983 Preparation of dry soil samples for various tests (second revision)
(Part 2) : 1973 Determination of water content (second revision)
(Part 3) : Determination of specific gravity
(Part 3/Set 1) : 1980 Fine-grained soils (first revision)
(Part 3/Set 2) : 1980 Fine, medium and coarse grained soils (first revision)
(Part 4) : ‘J985 Grain size analysis (second revision)
(Part 5) : 1985 Determination of liquid and plastic limits (second revision)
(Part 7) : 1980 Determination of water content - dry density relation using light
compaction (second revision)
(Part 8) : 1983 Determination of water content - dry density relation using heavy
compaction (second revision)
(Part 10) : 1973 Determination of unconfined compressive strength (first revision)
(Part 11) : 1971 Determination of the shear strength parameters of a specimen tested
in unconsolidated undrained triaxial compression without the
measurement of pore water pressure
(Part 13) : 1986 Direct shear test (second revision)
(Part 15) : 1986 Determination of consolidation properties (first revision)
(Part 16) : 1987 Laboratory determination of CBR (second revision)
(Part 17) : 1986 Laboratory determination of permeability (first revision)
(Part 22) : 1972 Determination of organic matter (first revision)
(Part23) : 1976 Determination of calcium carbonate (first revision)
(Part 26) : 1987 Determination of pH values (second revision)
(Part 28) : 1974 Determination of dry density of soils in-place, by thesand replacement
method (first revision)
(Part 29) : 1975 Determination of dry density of soils in-place, by the core cutter method
(first revision)
(Part33) : 1971 Determination of the density in-place by the ring and water replacement
method
(Part 34) : 1972 - Determination of density of soil in-place by rubber-balloon method
(Part 38) : 1976 Compaction control test (Hilf method)
(Part 39/Set 1) : 1977 Direct shear test for soils containing gravel, Section 1 Laboratory test
(Part 39/Set 2) : 1979 Direct shear test for soils containing gravel, Section 2 In-situ shear test
IS 2809 : 1972 Glossary of terms and symbols relating to soii engineering
(first revision)
1s 3495 (Parts 1 to4) : 1976 Methods of tests of burnt clay building bricks (secondrevision)
IS 4078 : 1980. Code of practice for indexing.and storage of drill cores (first revision)
IS 4432 : 1967 Case hardening steels
IS 4453 : 1980 Code of practice for subsurface exploration by pits, trenches, drifts
and shafts (first revision)
IS 4968 (Part 1) : 1976 Method for subsurface sounding for soils: Part 1 Dynamic method

using 50 mm cone without bentonite slurry (first revision)
IS 4968 (Part 2) : 1976 Method for subsurface sounding for soils : Part 2 Dynamic method
using cone and bentonite slurry (first revision)
IS 5313 : 1980 Guide for core drilling observations (first revision)
IS 5454 :1978 Methods for sampling of clay building bricks (first revision)
IS 5517 : 1978 Steels for hardenmg and tempering (first revision)
IS 5529 (Part 1) : 1985 Code of practice for in-situ permeability tests: Part 1 Tests in over-
burden (first revision)
IS 6403 : 1981 Code of practice for determination of bearing capacity of shallow
foundations (first revision)
IS 6926 : 1973 Code of practice for diamond core drilling for site investigation for
river valley projects
IS 6935 : 1973 Method of determination of water level in bore holes
IS 7746 : 1975 Code of practice for in-situ shear test on rock

SP36 - 2 - Soil Engineering PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

SP36 - 2 - Soil Engineering PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

SP36 - 2 - Soil Engineering PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LICENSED TO LANCO INFRATECH LIMITED, UDUOG VIHAR, GURGAON,

FOR INTERNAL USE AT THIS LOCATION ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE AT THIS LOCATION ONLY

BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

FOR INTERNAL USE AT THIS LOCATION ONLY

@ BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS

FOR INTERNAL USE AT THIS LOCATION ONLY

Section Title Covering IS : Page

1. Subsurface Investigation IS 1892 : 1979 . . 3

FOR INTERNAL USE AT THIS LOCATION ONLY

Sl Indian Standard Page

2. IS 1888 : 1982 Method of load test on soils (second revision) 53

FOR INTERNAL USE AT THIS LOCATION ONLY

16. IS 8763 : 1978 Guide for undisturbed sampling of sands 160

17. IS 9214 : 1979 Method of determination of modulus of subgrade reaction (K-value) 61

18. IS 9640 : 1980 Specification for split spoon sampler 75

FOR INTERNAL USE AT THIS LOCATION ONLY

COMPENDIUM OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERING - PART 2 3

FOR INTERNAL USE AT THIS LOCATION ONLY

2.2.1.1 Data regarding rem&al of 2.2.3.1 Electrical resistivity method - The

4 COMl!ENDIUM OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERING - PART 2

even oneborehole or &a\&‘nl‘the cenheVA TABLE1 DEPTROFEXPLORA’DON

FOR INTERNAL USE AT THIS LOCATION ONLY

COMPENDIUM OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERING - PART 2 5

FOR INTERNAL USE AT THIS LOCATION ONLY

2.5.1 In industrial areas, corrosive action may

FOR INTERNAL USE AT THIS LOCATION ONLY

COMPENDIUM OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERING - PART 2 i

FOR INTERNAL USE AT THIS LOCATION ONLY

8 COMPENDIUM OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERING - PART 2

SAND L’ SPUDDING ARM

BAILER I ARM AND SPOOLING

FOR INTERNAL USE AT THIS LOCATION ONLY

FIG. 2 TYPICAL ARRANGEMENT OF PERCUSSION DRILLING

L WEIGH7 FOR DRIVING DRILL

FOR INTERNAL USE AT THIS LOCATION ONLY

CHOPPING BIT, REPL

FIG. 3 TYPICAL ARRANGEMENT FOR WASH BORING

II I\\ YOKE AND KELLY DRIVE

STAND PIPE HOSE

FOR INTERNAL USE AT THIS LOCATION ONLY

ulr DRILL PIPE

.kb DRILL BIT

FIG.~ TYPICALARRANGEMENTFORROTARY DRILLING

6A Typical Pressure Meter Curve

FOR INTERNAL USE AT THIS LOCATION ONLY

FIG. 5 PRINCIPLE OF PRESSURE METER

3.8 Field Tests - Certain tests, if required, are to

useful to photograph the stratification in a) Cutting edge,

FOR INTERNAL USE AT THIS LOCATION ONLY

the ground and the information required 0,

4. SAMPLING TOOLS 4.1.2 Wall Friction- This can be reduced by :

COMPENDIUM OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERING - PART 2 13

correlate in-situ properties like density, shear

FOR INTERNAL USE AT THIS LOCATION ONLY

FOR INTERNAL USE AT THIS LOCATION ONLY

Disturbed Hand samples i) Soil identification, Cohesive soils 1

COMPENDIUM OF INDIAN STANDARDS ON SOIL ENGINEERING - PART 2 IS

FOR INTERNAL USE AT THIS LOCATION ONLY